User Manual

User Manual
Contents
Contents
Contents ....................................................................................... x-1 Features of the bizhub PRO C500 ................................................ x-9 Legal Restrictions on Copying .................................................... x-14
Basic
Section 1: Safety Information Safety Information ........................................................................ 1-4 Regulation Notices ..................................................................... 1-10 Caution Labels and Indicators .................................................... 1-12 Installation Space ....................................................................... 1-15 Section 2: Machine Information Machine Configuration ................................................................. 2-2
External Machine Items ................................................................... 2-2 Internal Machine Items .................................................................... 2-4 Standard/Optional Equipment ......................................................... 2-5 Control Panel Layout ....................................................................... 2-6 Basic Screen .................................................................................... 2-8 FS-513/FS-606 Finisher (with PK-507/PK-508 Punching Kit) ....... 2-10 PI-110 Cover Sheet Feeder ........................................................... 2-12 LT-211 Large Capacity Tray .......................................................... 2-13 TU-109 Trimmer Unit ..................................................................... 2-14
Turning On the Power Switch ..................................................... 2-16

To Turn On the Power ................................................................... 2-16 To Turn Off the Power ................................................................... 2-18 Reducing the Power in Standby Mode (Auto Low Power) ............ 2-19 Shutting Off Automatically (Auto Shut-Off) .................................... 2-20 Shutting Off / Reducing the Power Manually ................................ 2-21 Entering an EKC Password (EKC) ................................................. 2-22
Loading Paper ............................................................................ 2-23

Loading Paper in Tray 1 ,2, and 3 .................................................. 2-24 Loading Paper in Multi-Sheet Bypass Tray ................................... 2-27 Loading Paper in LCT (LT-211) ...................................................... 2-28 Loading Tabbed Sheets in Tray 1, 2, or 3 ..................................... 2-31 Loading Tabbed Sheets in LCT (LT-211) ....................................... 2-32 Loading Tabbed Sheets in Multi-Sheet Bypass Tray .................... 2-33 x-1
Contents
Section 3: Copying Operations Selecting Colour Mode ................................................................. 3-2 Positioning Originals ..................................................................... 3-4
Positioning Originals in RADF ..........................................................3-4 Positioning Original on Platen Glass ................................................3-8
Setting Print Quantity .................................................................. 3-10

To Set Print Quantity ......................................................................3-10 To Change Print Quantity ..............................................................3-11
Setting Job During Warm-up ...................................................... 3-12 To Stop Scanning/Printing .......................................................... 3-15 Selecting Paper Size ................................................................... 3-16
To Select Paper Size Automatically (APS) .....................................3-16 To Specify Desired Paper Size (AMS) ............................................3-18
Copying Using Special Paper (Multi-Sheet Bypass Tray) ........................................................... 3-20 Selecting Magnification Ratio (Lens Mode) ................................ 3-25
To Copy in 1.000 Magnification Mode ...........................................3-25 To Change Magnification Ratio (Fixed Magnification / Zoom Mode) ...............................................3-26
Making Double-Sided Copies (1)2, 2)2) .................................. 3-28

Using RADF ...................................................................................3-28 Using Platen Glass .........................................................................3-32
Making Single-Sided Copies from Double-Sided Originals (2)1) .. 336 To Scan Originals into Memory (Store Mode) ............................. 3-38 To Set Next Copying Job (Reserve) ............................................ 3-40 To Check/Control Jobs in Progress (Job Status Screen) ..................................................................... 3-43 Output Mode for Machine without Finisher ................................ 3-46 Output Mode for Machine with Finisher ...................................... 3-50 Selecting Binding Mode .............................................................. 3-59 Section 4: Helpful Functions Making Sample Copy (Proof Copy) .............................................. 4-2 Checking Feature Selections / Proof Copying (Check Mode) ...... 4-4 Interrupt Copying .......................................................................... 4-8 Storing Job Conditions (Job Memory: Job Store) ...................... 4-11 Recalling Stored Job Settings (Job Memory: Job Recall) .......... 4-14 Recalling Previous Job Settings ................................................. 4-15
x-2
Contents
Displaying Screen for Operation Guide (Help Mode) .................. 4-16
To Display Help Screen from Basic Screen ................................... 4-16 To Display Help Screen from Other Screens ................................. 4-19
Section 5: Troubleshooting When Call for Service Message Is Displayed ............................ 5-2
Limited Use of the Copier in Trouble ............................................... 5-4
Clearing Mishandled Paper .......................................................... 5-5 When JAM Appears on Folder Key (Or Arrow Key Flashes) ................................................................. 5-7 When ADD PAPER Appears on Folder Key (Or Arrow Key Flashes) ................................................................. 5-9 When Memory Full Message Is Displayed (Memory Overflow) ...................................................................... 5-11
Memory Overflow in Current Job ................................................... 5-12 Memory Overflow in Reserve Job .................................................. 5-13
When Power OFF/ON Screen Is Displayed ................................ 5-14 Troubleshooting Tips .................................................................. 5-15 Section 6: Specifications Main Body Specifications ............................................................. 6-2
Main Body ........................................................................................ 6-2
Option Specifications ................................................................... 6-4

RADF (DF-319) ................................................................................. 6-4 FS-513/FS-606 In-Bin Stapler Finisher ............................................ 6-4 PI-110 Cover Sheet Feeder ............................................................. 6-5 TU-109 Trimmer Unit ....................................................................... 6-5 PK-507/PK-508 Punching Kit .......................................................... 6-6 LT-211 Large Capacity Tray ............................................................ 6-6 Memory Unit .................................................................................... 6-6 Others .............................................................................................. 6-6
Advanced
Section 7: Colour Image Adjustment About Colours ............................................................................... 7-4
RGB and CMYK Models .................................................................. 7-4 HSB Model ...................................................................................... 7-6
x-3
Contents
Colour Copy Quality ...................................................................... 7-7
Modifying Colours ............................................................................7-7 Reproducing Images ......................................................................7-14 What Is Image Detection? ..............................................................7-15 Applying Filters ..............................................................................7-16 Improving Colour Copy Quality ......................................................7-18
Selecting Density Level and Whitening the Background ................................................................................. 7-19

To Adjust Copy Density / Background Whiteness .........................7-19 Setting Density Shift ......................................................................7-22
Changing Colours Using RGB and HSB Values (Colour Adjustment) .................................................................... 7-24
Modifying RGB Value .....................................................................7-24 Modifying HSB Value .....................................................................7-26
Changing Colours Using CMYK Value (Colour Balance Adjustment) ...................................................... 7-29 Selecting Line Screen, Dot Screen, or High Compression (Screen Setting) ........................................................................... 7-31 Adjusting Sharpness and Contrast / Selecting Gloss Mode ................................................................. 7-34 Making Fine Adjustment in Image Detection (Image Judge) ............................................................................. 7-37 Specifying Original Type (Original Image/Type in Special Original) .................................... 7-39 Section 8: Advanced Information Programmed Shut-Off (Weekly Timer) .......................................... 8-2 Rotation ......................................................................................... 8-4 Vertical/Horizontal Zoom Mode .................................................... 8-6 Making Folded Booklet (Fold / Stitch & Fold) ............................... 8-9 Punching File Holes in Copies (Punch) ....................................... 8-12 Output Three-Folded Copies (Three-Fold) .................................. 8-15 Making Trimmed Booklets (Trimming) ........................................ 8-17 Cover Sheet Feeding .................................................................. 8-20 Off-Line Finishing ........................................................................ 8-23 Tray Adjustment .......................................................................... 8-26
To Set the Adjustment Value .........................................................8-26 To Recall/Delete the Adjustment Value .........................................8-28
x-4
Contents
Section 9: Special Original Selecting Binding Direction .......................................................... 9-2 Specifying Original Direction ........................................................ 9-4 Copying Non-Standard Size Originals (Original Form) ................. 9-6 Copying Mixed Size Originals (Mixed Original) ............................. 9-9 Copying Z-Folded Originals (Z-Folded Original) ......................... 9-12 Scanning Thin/Thick Originals in RADF (Original Thickness) ..... 9-14 Section 10: Applications To Display Application Selection Screen .................................... 10-2 Inserting Sheets and Covers (Sheet/Cover Insertion) ................. 10-4 Locating Title Pages on the Right Side (Chapter) ....................... 10-8 Lay Out Several Pages onto One Sheet (Combination) ............ 10-11 Making a Multiple Page Signature Booklet (Booklet) ............... 10-15 Inserting Images into Printed Sets (Image Insert) ..................... 10-19 Dividing an Image into Right and Left Pages (Dual Page) ........ 10-23 Programming Different Settings for an Output Job (Program Job) ........................................................................... 10-27 Dividing an Image for Enlarged Copy (Multi-Page Enlargement) ......................................................... 10-30 Erasing Outside of the Original (Non-Image Area Erase) .......... 10-34 Reversing Colour in Image (Reverse Image) ............................. 10-36 Repeating Selected Image Area (Repeat: Vert./Horiz. Mode) .. 10-38 Repeating (Repeat: AUTO/Repeat Mode) ............................... 10-41 Eliminating Copy Marks (Frame/Fold Erasure) ......................... 10-44 Copying Image in the Centre of Copy Paper (AUTO Layout) ... 10-47 Adjusting Position of Copy Image (Image Shift) ....................... 10-49 Reducing Images to Create Binding Margin (Reduce&Shift) .... 10-52 Printing Stamp, Page, Date/Time onto Copies (Stamp) ........... 10-55 Printing Watermark onto Copies (Stamp) ................................. 10-62 Overlaying an Image onto Each Page Copied in the Job (Overlay) .................................................................................... 10-67 Storing Overlay Image in HDD (Overlay Memory) ..................... 10-70
x-5
Contents
Section 11: Network Function To Use Web Utilities .................................................................... 11-2 To Display Information on Machine ............................................ 11-4 To Display Current Machine Status (Job Status) ........................ 11-6 Setting E-Mail Transmission Function ........................................ 11-8 Setting E.K.C. Function ............................................................. 11-10 Setting Scan Transmission Function ........................................ 11-21 Transmitting/Editing Machine Setting File ................................ 11-25 Section 12: Paper and Original Information Paper Information ....................................................................... 12-2
Paper Weight .................................................................................12-3 Tray / Exit Tray Capacity ................................................................12-5 Paper Size ......................................................................................12-7 Special Paper in Multi-Sheet Bypass Tray ....................................12-9 To Store Copy Paper .....................................................................12-9
Original Information ................................................................... 12-10

Platen Glass Originals ..................................................................12-10 RADF Originals .............................................................................12-11
Section 13: Maintenance & Supplies Adding Toner .............................................................................. 13-2 Inserting a New Staple Cartridge into FS-513/FS-606 Finisher .. 13-7 Empty Waste Basket of PK-507/PK-508 Punching Kit ............. 13-11 Empty Waste Basket of TU-109 Trimmer Unit .......................... 13-13 Exchanging Toner Recovery Box .............................................. 13-15 Cleaning Image Scanning Section ............................................ 13-17
Cleaning the Document Glass .....................................................13-18 Cleaning the RADF Platen Guide Cover ......................................13-19 Cleaning the Platen Cover ...........................................................13-20
Checking Copy Count ............................................................... 13-21

To Display the Counter List Screen .............................................13-22 To Print the Counter List ..............................................................13-23
Periodic Maintenance ............................................................... 13-24

To Check the PM Counter ...........................................................13-25
x-6
Contents
Section 14: Key Operator Mode An Outline of the Key Operator Mode ........................................ 14-2
How to Access the Key Operator Mode ........................................ 14-2
[1] System Initial Setting ............................................................. 14-5

[1] Date & Time Setting .................................................................. 14-5 [2] Language Select Setting ........................................................... 14-7 [3] IP Address Setting .................................................................... 14-8 [4] E-Mail Transmission Setting ..................................................... 14-9
[2] Copier Initial Setting ............................................................. 14-11 [3] User Setting Mode ............................................................... 14-12
[1] User Lens Mode Ratio Setting ................................................ 14-12
[4] EKC (Electronic Key Counter) Function Setting ................... 14-13

How to Access the EKC Setting Mode ........................................ 14-14 [1] E.K.C. Data Edit ...................................................................... 14-15 [2] E.K.C. All Count Reset ............................................................ 14-18 [3] E.K.C. Function Setting .......................................................... 14-19 [4] Scanner Function Setting ....................................................... 14-20
[5] Lock/Delete Job Memory .................................................... 14-21 [6] Paper Type / Special Size Set ............................................. 14-22
[1] Paper Type / Special Size Set ................................................ 14-22 [2] Paper Type Set (Bypass) ........................................................ 14-24
[7] Panel Contrast / Key Sound Adjustment ............................. 14-25 [8] Key Operator Data Setting ................................................... 14-26 [9] Weekly Timer ....................................................................... 14-27
How to Access the Weekly Timer Setting Mode ......................... 14-28 [1] Weekly Timer On/Off Setting .................................................. 14-29 [2] Timer Setting ........................................................................... 14-30 [3] Timer Action On/Off Setting .................................................... 14-32 [4] Lunch Hour Off Setting ........................................................... 14-33 [5] Timer Interrupt Password Setting ........................................... 14-34
[10] Control Panel Adjustment .................................................. 14-35 [11] Tray Auto Select Setting .................................................... 14-36 [12] Power Save Setting ........................................................... 14-37 [13] Memory Switch Setting ...................................................... 14-38 [14] Machine Management List Print ........................................ 14-45 [15] Call Remote Centre ............................................................ 14-46 [16] Finisher Adjustment ........................................................... 14-47 [17] Front & Back Density Setting ............................................. 14-49 [18] Scan Transmission Setting ................................................ 14-50 [19] Non-Image Area Erase Setting .......................................... 14-52
x-7
Contents
[20] AE Adjustment ................................................................... 14-53 [21] Execute Adjustment Operation .......................................... 14-54 [22] Magnification Adjustment .................................................. 14-55 [23] Timing Adjustment ............................................................. 14-56 [24] Centring Adjustment .......................................................... 14-58 [25] Printer Gamma Sensor Adjustment ................................... 14-59
Index
Index ............................................................................................ ix-3
x-8
Features of the bizhub PRO C500

AE - Automatic Exposure Automatically adjusts exposure to compensate for quality of the original. AMS - Automatic Magnification Selection Automatically selects an appropriate magnification ratio when Paper Size is selected manually. APS - Automatic Paper Selection Automatically selects paper size to match the original documents. ATS - Automatic Tray Switching Automatically switches tray to allow printing and copying to continue without interruption if the selected tray empties while copying is in progress. Auto Layout The original image on the platen glass or in the document feeder is copied and centred on a sheet. Auto Low Power Automatically lowers the power after a specified period of system inactivity. Auto Reset Automatically resets to auto mode defaults after a specified period of system inactivity. Auto Shut-Off Automatically shuts off the main power after a specified period of system inactivity. Booklet Creates a multiple page signature booklet copied on both sides of paper in 1)2 or 2)2 copy mode. Chapter Starts chapter pages on the right side (front pages) of the finished document. Only duplex mode (1)2) is compatible with this feature. Colour Mode Copies full-coloured originals or makes single-coloured copies, and also adjusts image quality of the copies. Combination Copies a fixed number (2, 4, or 8) of pages onto one sheet of copy paper to save paper while creating a draft copy of your document. Copy Density Manually selects up to 9 density levels. Copy Mode Selects the desired simplex mode (1)1 or 2)1); or duplex mode (1)2 or 2)2). Counter List Displays on the screen and prints the following data: total counter of the machine, copier counter, print counter and the date when the counter started.
x-9

Density Shift Shifts each of nine density levels in four density modes (Auto, Text, Photo, Map) to three levels lighter or three levels darker. Dual Page Copies both pages of an open book or A3/B4 size sheet separately onto two A4/B5 size sheets in 1)1 mode or separately onto each side of one A4/B5 size sheet in 1)2 mode. You can use the Dual Page mode with the Front or Front/Back cover mode. The cover page(s) will be scanned and copied normally before image division is performed on the other pages. Frame/Fold Erasure Erases border and/or fold image area using Frame (1 - 300 mm), Fold (1 - 99 mm), or Frame & Fold. Image Insert Stores pages in memory from the platen glass, and inserts the pages into a document copied from the document feeder. Image Shift Creates or removes a binding margin at the top, bottom, right and left edges (shift amount from 0 ~ 250 mm, in 1 mm increments); reduces image to prevent image loss (reduce & shift amount from 0 ~ 250 mm, in 1 mm increments). Interrupt Copying Interrupts job-in-progress to perform an urgent copy, using any of the copier features for the interrupt job. Job Memory Programs up to 30 jobs and recalls each job by job number, as needed. All compatible Platen glass functions can be programmed into Job Memory directly after they are selected. Job Status Displays the Job Status Screen to view the current machine status, changes the operation order of reserve jobs, deletes the unused reserve job, or displays the previous job list. Lens Mode (Fixed, Zoom) Selects fixed ratios, four reduction, four enlargement, and three user-set ratios. Zoom ratios can be selected from 25.0% ~ 400.0% in 0.1% increments. Machine Status Confirmation Displays the current machine status on LCD for confirmation. Manual Shut-off Shuts off the machine power when pressing [POWER SAVER ON/OFF] on the control panel. Mixed Original Copies mixed size originals from the document feeder in APS or AMS mode. APS automatically selects the paper size of each original. AMS mode allows you to select one paper size for all originals. Multi-Page Enlargement Makes an enlarged copy of an original by dividing to several pages.
x-10

Network Function by Web Browser When the machine is connected to a PC over a network, it uses a web browser on the PC to check the machine or job information, and to perform the Key Operator settings concerning the network environment. Non-Image Area Erase When copying from the platen glass when the document cover is open, copies only the image area and not the exposed area of glass, which would otherwise copy as black. Non STD Size for Multi-Sheet Bypass Tray Enters the special paper size to be loaded on the Multi-sheet bypass tray using the touch screen keypad in order to avoid paper misfeed. Non STD Size for Original Identifies the special original size which the bizhub PRO C500 cannot detect, in order to select the optimal paper size for copying or printing. Original Image Enhances photo image in PHOTO mode, regular image in TEXT/PHOTO mode, text image in TEXT mode, coloured image with small text in MAP mode. Original Type Improves the image quality by specifying the printed original type. Output Mode for Machine with FS-513/FS-606 Finisher Installed: Non-Sort, Sort, Staple-Sort, and Group modes using the primary (main) tray Non-Sort Face Down exit, Non-Sort Face Up exit, Group Face Down exit, and Group Face Up exit modes using the secondary (sub) tray Fold and Stitch & Fold modes using the booklet tray (FS-606 only) Selects an output tray and output mode on the Output Mode popup menu. Output for Machine with no Finisher Installed: Non-sort, Rotation sort, Group, and Rotation group modes are available in combination with Face down or Face up exit. Selects an output mode on the Output Mode popup menu. Output for FS-513/FS-606 Finisher with PI-110 Cover Sheet Feeder Installed: Cover Sheet mode Off-Line Finishing mode For details, see Section 8: "Advanced Information". Overlay Scans an original image and overlays it on the pages of another document. For example, you may want to incorporate a page heading, graphic design or logo into the pages of your document. Overlay Memory Stores Overlay images in the systems memory. Paper Capacity Total 1,750 sheets, including three 500-sheet trays and a 250-sheet Multi-sheet bypass tray. Total 4,250 sheets, including 2,500-sheet optional large capacity tray.
x-11

Platen Memory Scans documents into memory from the platen glass and/or the document feeder and inserts the pages into another document copied from the document feeder. If an incompatible function is selected in this mode, the latter function will not be selected, and an Error message will be displayed. Power Saver Automatically turns off all but nominal power supply after a specified period of copier inactivity, for optimal efficiency. Power is returned after a brief warm up period by pressing [POWER SAVER ON/OFF] on the control panel. Program Job Scans documents into memory while designating different copy conditions for each original, then prints all the documents collectively. Proof Copy To ensure correct output before running multiple copies, run a proof copy by pressing [PROOF COPY] on the control panel or touching PROOF COPY on the Check Screen. Punch Mode for FS-513/FS-606 Finisher with PK-507/PK-508 Punching Kit Installed Punches four holes in output copies. Repeat Selects the horizontal image area across the page, and repeats it down the page as many times as the repeat width setting (10 ~ 150 mm) permits in manual or auto. Reserve Scans in subsequent copy jobs while the bizhub PRO C500 is busy printing or copying. Reverse Image Reverses the positive image to negative image or vice versa in the selected colour mode. Rotation Rotates the image before copying when the portrait/landscape orientation of the original is different from the orientation of the copy paper. Rotation Exit (Rotation Sort / Rotation Group) When no Finisher is installed, Rotation Exit alternately switches the horizontal and vertical orientation of each sorted set as it outputs to the exit tray. Be sure to load both A4 and A4R in separate trays (including the Multi-sheet bypass tray) before selecting this feature. Sheet/Cover Insertion Insert up to 30 blank or copied sheets from any tray including the Multi-sheet bypass tray, or inserts blank or copied front and back covers from any tray including the Multi-sheet bypass tray to enhance the presentation of multi-page documents. Stamp Prints watermark, regular stamp, date/time, page number, and numbering onto the output copies to enhance the presentation and usefulness of the copies.
x-12

Staple Selects the stapling position and number of staples. STD Size (Special) Detects the standard paper sizes which cannot normally be detected when loaded in a main body tray or Multi-sheet bypass tray. Tab Paper Copies onto tabbed sheets from tabbed originals, allowing the image on the tab part of the original to be printed on the same part of the tabbed copy paper. Three-Fold Mode for Machine with FS-606 Finisher Installed: Folds A4 or 8.5x11R output copies in three. Tray Adjustment Performs image adjustments for printing on pages contained in a specific paper tray and enables you to recall adjustment values from the Basic Screen. Trimming Mode for FS-606 Finisher with TU-109 Trimmer Unit Installed: Trim the end of folded or stitched & folded booklets. Weekly Timer Can be set according to the needs of each work environment. Turns main body power Off/On daily or weekly, during lunch time, on holidays, and also enables the Timer Interrupt mode, which allows temporary use of the machine even when the machine is in the daily, weekly, or holiday Off mode. Wide Size Paper Copies onto paper slightly larger than the specified regular size. Z-Folded Original This feature sets the RADF to accept Z-folded originals.
x-13
Legal Restrictions on Copying
Legal Restrictions on Copying

Certain types of documents must never be copied with the purpose or intent to pass copies of such documents off as the originals. The following is not a complete list, but is meant to be used as a guide to responsible copying. Financial Instruments - Personal checks - Travelers checks - Money orders - Certificates of deposit - Bonds or other certificates of indebtedness - Stock certificates Legal Documents - Food stamps - Postage stamps (canceled or uncanceled) - Checks or drafts drawn by government agencies - Internal revenue stamps (canceled or uncanceled) - Passports - Immigration papers - Motor vehicle licenses and titles - House and property titles and deeds General - Identification cards, badges, or insignias - Copyrighted works without permission of the copyright owner You are prohibited under any circumstances to copy domestic or foreign currencies, or works of art without permission of the copyright owner. When in doubt about the nature of a document, consult with legal counsel.
x-14
Basic
Safety Information
Precautions for Installation and Use
Safety Information................................................................................1-4 Regulation Notices.............................................................................1-10 Caution Labels and Indicators ...........................................................1-12 Installation Space...............................................................................1-15
Safety Information
Safety Information
This section contains detailed instructions on the operation and maintenance of this machine. To achieve optimum utility of this device, all operators should carefully read and follow the instructions in this manual. Please read the following section before connecting the machine to the supply. It contains important information related to user safety and preventing equipment problems. Please keep this manual in a handy place near the machine. Make sure you observe all of the precautions appear in each section of this manual.
Note: Some parts of the contents of this section may not correspond with the purchased product.
Warning and Precaution Symbols The following indicators are used on the warning labels or in this manual to categorize the level of safety warnings. WARNING Ignoring this warning could cause serious injury or even death. CAUTION Ignoring this caution could cause injury or damage to property. Meaning of Symbols A triangle indicates a danger against which you should take precaution. This symbol warns against cause burns. A diagonal line indicates a prohibited course of action. This symbol warns against dismantling the device. A solid circle indicates an imperative course of action. This symbol indicates you must unplug the device.
1-4
Safety Information
Disassemble and modification WARNING Do not attempt to remove the covers and panels which have been fixed to the product. Some products have a high-voltage part or a laser beam source inside that could cause an electrical shock or blindness. Do not modify this product, as a fire, electrical shock, or breakdown could result. If the product employs a laser, the laser beam source could cause blindness.
Power cord WARNING Do not scratch, abrade, place a heavy object on, heat, twist, bend, pull on, or damage the power cord. Use of a damaged power cord (exposed core wire, broken wire, etc.) could result in a fire or breakdown. Should any of these conditions be found, immediately turn OFF the power switch, unplug the power cord from the power outlet, and then call your authorized service representative.
1-5
Safety Information
Power source WARNING Use only the specified power source voltage. Failure to do that could result in a fire or electrical shock. Connect power plug directly into wall outlet having the same configuration as the plug. Use of an adapter leads to the product connecting to inadequate power supply (voltage, current capacity, grounding), and may result in fire or shock. If proper wall outlet is not available, the customer shall ask qualified electrician for the installation. Do not use a multiple outlet adapter nor an extension cord in principle. Use of an adapter or an extension cord could cause a fire or electrical shock. Contact your authorized service representative if an extension cord is required. Consult your authorized service representative before connecting other equipment on the same wall outlet. Overload could result in a fire. CAUTION The outlet must be near the equipment and easily accessible. Otherwise you can not pull out the power plug when an emergency occurs.
Power plug WARNING Do not unplug and plug in the power cord with a wet hand, as an electrical shock could result. Plug the power cord all the way into the power outlet. Failure to do this could result in a fire or electrical shock. CAUTION Do not tug the power cord when unplugging. Pulling on the power cord could damage the cord, resulting in a fire or electrical shock. Remove the power plug from the outlet more than one time a year and clean the area between the plug terminals. Dust that accumulates between the plug terminals may cause a fire.
1-6
Safety Information
Grounding WARNING Connect the power cord to an electrical outlet that is equipped with a grounding terminal.
Installation WARNING Do not place a flower vase or other container that contains water, or metal clips or other small metallic objects on this product. Spilled water or metallic objects dropped inside the product could result in a fire, electrical shock, or breakdown. Should a piece of metal, water, or any other similar foreign matter get inside the product, immediately turn OFF the power switch, unplug the power cord from the power outlet, and then call your authorized service representative. CAUTION After installing this product, mount it on a secure base. If the unit moves or falls, it may cause personal injury. Do not place the product in a dusty place, or a site exposed to soot or steam, near a kitchen table, bath, or a humidifier. A fire, electrical shock, or breakdown could result. Do not place this product on an unstable or tilted bench, or in a location subject to a lot of vibration and shock. It could drop or fall, causing personal injury or mechanical breakdown. Do not let any object plug the ventilation holes of this product. Heat could accumulate inside the product, resulting in a fire or malfunction. Do not use flammable sprays, liquids, or gases near this product, as a fire could result.
1-7
Safety Information
Ventilation CAUTION Always use this product in a well ventilated location. Operating the product in a poorly ventilated room for an extended period of time could injure your health. Ventilate the room at regular intervals.
Actions in response to troubles WARNING Do not keep using this product, if this product becomes inordinately hot or emits smoke, or unusual odor or noise. Immediately turn OFF the power switch, unplug the power cord from the power outlet, and then call your authorized service representative. If you keep on using it as is, a fire or electrical shock could result. Do not keep using this product, if this product has been dropped or its cover damaged. Immediately turn OFF the power switch, unplug the power cord from the power outlet, and then call your authorized service representative. If you keep on using it as is, a fire or electrical shock could result. CAUTION The inside of this product has areas subject to high temperature, which may cause burns. When checking the inside of the unit for malfunctions such as a paper misfeed, do not touch the locations (around the fusing unit, etc.) which are indicated by a Caution HOT caution label.
1-8
Safety Information
Consumables WARNING Do not throw the toner bottle or toner into an open flame. The hot toner may scatter and cause burns or other damage. CAUTION Do not leave a toner bottle or drum in a place within easy reach of children. Licking or ingesting any of these things could injure your health. Do not store toner units and PC drum units near a floppy disk or watch that are susceptible to magnetism. They could cause these products to malfunction.
When moving the machine CAUTION Whenever moving this product, be sure to disconnect the power cord and other cables. Failure to do this could damage the cord or cable, resulting in a fire, electrical shock, or breakdown. When moving this product, always hold it by the locations specified in the User manual or other documents. If the unit falls it may cause severe personal injury. The product may also be damaged or malfunction.
Before successive holidays CAUTION Unplug the product when you will not use the product for long periods of time.
1-9
Regulation Notices
Regulation Notices
- Laser Safety This product employs a Class 3B laser diode having maximum power of 7 mW and wavelength of 650 nm. This product is certified as a Class 1 laser product. Since the laser beam is concealed by protective housings, the product does not emit hazardous laser radiation as long as the product is operated according to the instructions in this manual. - For Denmark Users ADVARSEL Usynlig laserstrling ved bning, nr sikkerhedsafbrydere er ude af funktion. Undg udsttelse for srling. Klasse 1 laser produkt der opfylder IEC 60825-1 sikkerheds kravene. Dansk: Dette er en halvlederlaser. Laserdiodens hjeste styrke er 7 mW og blgelngden er 650 nm. - For Norway Users ADVARSEL Dersom apparatet brukes p annen mte enn spesifisert I denne bruksanvisning, kan brukeren utsettes for usynlig laserstrling som overskrider grensen for laser klass 1. Dette en halvleder laser. Maksimal effekt till laserdiode er 7 mW og bkgelengde er 650 nm. - For Finland, Sweden Users LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE KLASS 1 LASER APPARAT VAROITUS! Laitteen kyttminen muulla kuin tss kyttohjeessa mainitulla tavalla saattaa altistaa kyttjn turvallisuusluokan 1 ylittvlle nkymttmlle lasersteilylle. Tm on puolijohdelaser. Laserdiodin suurin teho on 7 mW ja aallonpituus on 650 nm. VARNING! Om apparaten anvnds p annat stt n I denna bruksanvisning specificerats, kan anvndaren utsttas fr osynlig laserstrlning, som verskrider grnsen fr laserklass 1. Det hr r en halvledarlaser. Den maximala effekten fr laserdioden r 7 mW och vglngden r 650 nm.
1-10
Regulation Notices
KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. 1-6-1, Marunouchi, Chiyoda-ku, Tokyo, Japan MANUFACTURED: KHK THIS PRODUCT COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR CHAPTER I, SUBCHAPTER J
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT APPAREIL A RAYONNEMENT LASER DE CLASSE 1 LASER KLASSE 1 PRODUKT
- Ozone Release During print operation, a small quantity of ozone is released. This amount is not large enough to harm anyone adversely. However, be sure the room where the machine is being used has adequate ventilation, especially if you are printing a high volume of materials, or if the machine is being used continuously over a long period. - Electromagnetic Interference This product must be used with a shielded network cable and shielded USB interface cable. The use of non-shield cables is likely to result in interference with radio communications and is prohibited under CISPR 22 and local rules. - For European Users This product complies with the following EU directives: 89/336/EEC, 73/23/EEC and 93/68/EEC This declaration is valid for the areas of the European Union (EU) or EFTA only. This device must be used with a shielded network cable and shielded USB interface cable. The use of non-shielded cables is likely to result in interference with radio communications and is prohibited under 89/336/EEC rules. - For German Users Maschinenlarminformations -Verordnung - 3. GSGV, 18.01.1991: Der arbeitsplatzbezogene Immisionswert betraegt 70 dB(A) oder weniger nach ISO 7779.
1-11
Caution Labels and Indicators

The caution labels and indicators are attached to the machine areas, as shown below, where you are advised to pay special attention to avoid any dangerous situations or serious injury.
(Right side of the fixing unit)

CAUTION High temperature! CAUTION High temperature! VORSICHT Heisse Oberflche! ATTENTION Temprature leve! ATTENTION Temprature leve! PRECAUCION Temperatura alta! PRECAUCION Temperatura alta! Alta temperatura! CUIDADO ATTENZIONE Alta temperatura!
CAUTION
DO NOT put your hand between the main body and developing fixing unit; otherwise you may be injured.
CAUTION PRECAUCION CAUTION VORSICHT ATTENZIONE
ATTENTION CUIDADO ATTENTION PRECAUCION
CAUTION
DO NOT put your hand between the main body and developing fixing unit; otherwise you may be injured.
High temperature! Temprature leve! Temperatura alta! Alta temperatura! High temperature! Temprature leve!
Heisse Oberflche!
CAUTION
ATTENTION
PRECAUCION CUIDADO
CAUTION
The fixing unit is very hot. To avoid getting burned DO NOT TOUCH.
CAUTION
ATTENTION VORSICHT
Temperatura alta!
Alta temperatura!
PRECAUCION ATTENZIONE
(Top surface of the fixing unit)
CAUTION
(Inside of the fixing unit) The conveyance fixing unit is heavy. Use care and draw it out gently; otherwise you may be injured.
1-12
CAUTION
DO NOT INSERT your finger into the two RADF hinge portions; otherwise you may be injured.
(Rear side of the RADF)
(Right rear side of the Main body)
(Inside of the LCT)
WARNING
DO NOT throw the toner recovery box into a fire. If it is thrown into a fire, the toner may ignite and cause a dangerous situation.
CAUTION
To avoid any unexpected injury, DO NOT put your hand into the holes (3 places) on the bottom plate of the LCT.
1-13
(Finisher with PI-110 Cover Sheet Feeder only)

CAUTION ATTENTION PRECAUCION CUIDADO
CAUTION ATTENTION VORSICHT PRECAUCION ATTENZIONE
CAUTION
DO NOT insert your finger into the bottom of the upper part of the feeder when returning to its original position; otherwise you may be injured.
CAUTION
To avoid injury, DO NOT put your hand on top of the printed sheets. Be sure to hold both sides of the printed sheets when removing them, and DO NOT leave your hand on the printed sheets while the primary (main) tray goes up.
CAUTION CAUTION
Use care after opening the paper exit outlet. DO NOT put your hand into it; otherwise you may be injured. Inside the lower paper exit outlet is the roller drive unit. DO NOT put your hand into it; otherwise you may be injured.
1-14
Installation Space
Installation Space
Allow sufficient space for facilitating copy operation, changing parts, and periodic inspection. Leave an adequate space behind the machine to let hot air out from the rear fan.
Unit: mm
bizhub PRO C500 + CV-131 (Front)
bizhub PRO C500 + CV-131 (Right side)
bizhub PRO C500 + DF-319 (Front)
bizhub PRO C500 + DF-319 (Right side)
bizhub PRO C500 + DF-319 + FS-513 (Front)
1-15
Installation Space
Unit: mm
bizhub PRO C500 + DF-319 + FS-606 + PI-110 + LT-211 (Front)
bizhub PRO C500 + DF-319 +LT-211 (Right Side)
bizhub PRO C500 + DF-319 + FS-606 + PI-110 + LT-211 + TU-109A Kit + TU-109 (Front)
Finisher primary (main) tray of FS-513/FS-606 Finisher gradually goes down while printed materials output. DO NOT allow any object to interfere with the operation of the tray on the left side of the finisher, as any interference may cause damage to the finisher.
1-16
Machine Information
Machine Configuration, Turning On the Power and Loading Paper
Machine Configuration.........................................................................2-2 Turning On the Power Switch ............................................................2-16 Loading Paper....................................................................................2-23
Machine Configuration
External Machine Items
2-2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 RADF (Reversing Automatic Document Feeder) (option) automatically feeds multiple originals one at a time to the platen glass for copying. Platen cover (option) covers documents to be copied and holds them in place. Work table provides a convenient workspace for documents both before and after copying. Key counter (option) manages the number of copies made on the machine. Toner access door opens to replenish the black toner or colour toner. Toner recovery box door opens to replace the filled toner recovery box with new one. Multi-sheet bypass tray opens to use copy paper of the other size or type than those loaded in the main body trays or LCT. Tray 4 (LT-211 Large Capacity Tray) (option) holds 2,500 sheets (90 g/m2 paper) from 13x19 to B5. Right side door opens to allow removal of mishandled paper. Tray 3 (universal tray) is user-adjustable and holds 500 sheets (90 g/m2 paper) from 13x19 to A5R. Tray 2 (universal tray) is user-adjustable and holds 500 sheets (90 g/m2 paper) from 13x19 to A5R. Tray 1 (universal tray) is user-adjustable and holds 500 sheets (90 g/m2 paper) from 13x19 to A5R. Front door opens to allow removal of mishandled paper. FS-513 Finisher (option) sorts, staple-sorts, or groups copies into finished sets. FS-606 Finisher (option) sorts, staple-sorts, or groups copies into finished sets. FS-606 also folds or staples & folds copies into booklet-styled sets, or folds max. 3 copies in three. TU-109A kit (option) connects the finisher and trimmer unit. TU-109 Trimmer unit (option) trims the end of booklet. PI-110 Cover sheet feeder (option) loads cover sheet paper and feeds the sheet as cover to the sorted sets, used in combination with FS-513/FS-606 Finisher. Power switch turns copier power On/Off when pressed. LCD Touch screen displays interactive operation screens. Control panel controls copier operations and displays messages as required.
2-3
Internal Machine Items
1 2 3 4 5
Lever A can be moved to withdraw the conveyance fixing unit for removal of mishandled paper. Fixing unit fuses the toner onto the copy paper. Main power switch used only by service representative turns machine power on/off when pressed. Total counter indicates the total number of prints made. Black print counter indicates the total number of the black prints made.
2-4
Standard/Optional Equipment
PK-507/PK-508 Punching kit PI-110 Cover sheet feeder
DF-319 Document feeder CV-131 Platen cover Work table
Key counter
FS-513 Finisher
bizhub PRO C500 main body MU-412 Memory unit HD-106 Hard disk drive
LT-211 Large capacity tray
IP-901Printer controller (Fiery S300 50C-K)
FS-606 Finisher
TU-109A kit TU-109 Trimmer unit
2-5
Control Panel Layout
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
19 18 17 16
15
14 13
12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
CONTRAST ADJUSTMENT DIAL can be turned to adjust the touch panel contrast. LCD TOUCH SCREEN displays machine and copying status, help information, interactive screens, and touch keys for selecting all functions. CHECK displays a screen showing all settings that are selected for the current job. HELP displays a screen with help for the currently selected function, or to access the Key Operator Mode Screen. KEYPAD enters numeric values. PRINTER switches the machine operation mode to printer. This key functions only when internal print controller is installed. SCANNER switches the machine operation mode to scanner. COPY switches the machine operation mode to copy. TIMER lights when the timer function is set. INTERRUPT stops copying in progress to allow copying from the platen glass. POWER SAVER ON/OFF activates power-saving mode for times when the copier is inactive, or activates Timer Interrupt mode when Weekly Timer function is active. STOP stops the copying sequence; deletes the stored memory. PROOF COPY outputs a single set of copies to confirm whether the current settings are selected properly. START activates copying or scanning. [C] (CLEAR QTY.) allows resetting of print quantity.
2-6
16 17 18 19 [P] (COUNTER) displays the Counter Screen or accesses programming modes for setting special functions. AUTO RESET restores copier to automatic mode settings or to Key Operator settings. JOB MEMORY displays screens for selecting job store/job recall functions. ACCESS sets the machine to allow copying only when the EKC password is entered.
The touch screen of the control panel is covered with glass. Do not drop heavy objects on the glass or put excess weight or pressure on it, otherwise the glass may be scratched or break to cause injury.
When the Call for Service Screen (p. 5-2) is displayed, be sure to contact your service representative immediately.
The control panel of this machine can be slightly lowered to three angled positions to ensure easy access by anyone, regardless of the physical or positional status of the operator. Your authorized service representative can make this setting for you.
2-7
Basic Screen
4 5
Folder keys: FREE JOB is selected to specify a copy job conditions. When scanning starts, FREE JOB changes to SCAN JOB, then changes to PRINT JOB when the machine starts printing. FREE JOB at the right side of SCAN JOB or PRINT JOB can be touched to specify a reserve job conditions. Up to 9 reserve jobs can be set. The arrow keys at the right side of folder keys are used to scroll. Word icons: ADD TONER icon is displayed when toner supply becomes low. The toner colour to be supplied is indicated by a letter; C (cyan), M (magenta), Y (yellow), or K (black). Printer icon indicates the machine status when operating as a printer. Graphic icons: Original direction icon indicates the original direction specified on the Special Original popup menu. Image adjust icon indicates the enhance mode specified on the Special Original popup menu. Rotation icon is displayed when Rotation automatically functions. Toner recovery box icon is displayed when replacement of the toner recovery box is due. PM icon is displayed when preventive maintenance is due. Message area displays the machine status and procedure required at that time. Reserve job counts the reserve jobs already specified.
2-8
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 Original count counts the original pages placed in the document feeder as they are scanned. TYPE/SIZE key appears when the Bypass key is selected, and is touched to specify the type and size of the paper loaded in the Multi-sheet bypass tray. Count/Set indicator indicates the print quantity entered from the control panel keypad, and also indicates the print count on the left of the set count while printing. Memory indicator indicates the remaining memory available for the next operation. STATUS key is touched to view the current job status, to change the printing order of reserve jobs, or to cancel printing a reserve job. IMAGE ADJUST key is touched to display five sorts of the Image Adjustment Setting Screens to adjust the image quality. SPECIAL ORIGINAL key is touched to specify the condition of originals to be scanned. APPLICATION key is touched to select various application functions. ROTATION OFF key is touched to release the Rotation function. STORE key is touched to store scanned images into memory. Lens mode area is used to select the desired magnification ratio. Paper size area is used to select the desired paper size or APS. Copy mode area is used to select the copy mode (1)1, 1)2, 2)1, or 2)2). Colour mode area is used to specify the desired colour mode (single colour, black, full colour, or auto). Output mode keys are used to specify the desired output mode. Output icon area displays the appropriate output icon according to the selected output mode.
2-9
FS-513/FS-606 Finisher (with PK-507/PK-508 Punching Kit)
FS-513 Finisher
FS-606 Finisher
1 2 3 4
Finisher door opens to the internal Finisher to allow clearing mishandled paper, replenishing staples, and emptying waste basket of Punching kit. Booklet tray (FS-606 Finisher only) holds sets output in Fold mode, Stapling & Fold mode, or Three-fold mode. Primary (Main) tray holds sets output in Non-sort mode, Sort mode (offset), Staple-sort mode, or Group mode (offset). Secondary (Sub) tray holds sets output in Sort mode or Group mode with face down/up mode.
2-10
FS-513 Finisher
FS-606 Finisher with PK-507/PK-508 Punching kit
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Entrance lever opens downward to remove mishandled paper. PK-507/PK-508 Punching kit (option) punches file holes in the output copies. Cover sheet conveyance lever opens to remove mishandled paper. Sub tray conveyance lever opens to remove mishandled paper. Stacker conveyance lever opens to remove mishandled paper. Lower lever opens to remove mishandled paper. Stacker unit knob can be turned to ease removal of mishandled paper from the Stacker unit. Stacker unit folds or stitches & folds copies into booklet-styled sets, and also folds max. 3 copies in three. Waste basket (option) holds waste paper punched out. Stacker unit handle withdraws unit to allow removal of mishandled paper and replacement of staple cartridge. Cartridge housing holds staple cartridge to be replaced when supplying staples.
2-11
PI-110 Cover Sheet Feeder
1 2 3 4 5 6
Cover sheet feeder control panel controls cover sheet feeder operations. Upper unit release lever can be moved to slide the upper unit of cover sheet feeder for removal of mishandled paper. Upper tray guide plates hold cover sheets to fix the position. Upper tray holds cover sheets for use in cover sheet output mode. Lower tray holds cover sheets for use in cover sheet output mode or a copied set in manual stapling/punching/three-fold mode. Lower tray guide plates hold cover sheets to fix the position.
2-12
LT-211 Large Capacity Tray
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
LCT lever can be moved downward to ease removal of mishandled paper. LCT top door opens to allow paper loading or removal of mishandled paper. LCT left side door opens to allow removal of mishandled paper. Paper loading button is pressed to lower the bottom plate to allow loading paper. Paper feed roller conveys the copy paper to the main body. LCT paper guides hold copy paper to fix the position. LCT paper guide knobs can be turned to move or fix the LCT paper guide. Rear stopper fixes the rear end of copy paper. Rear stopper knobs can be turned to move or fix the rear stopper. LCT bottom plate goes up automatically when paper supply becomes low, and goes down when the paper loading button is pressed.
2-13
TU-109 Trimmer Unit
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Front-right cover opens to allow removal of mishandled paper. Front door opens to allow removal of mishandled paper or waste paper. Trimmer stacker holds sets output in Trimming mode. Trimmer unit tray slides to the left side each time a trimmed booklet is delivered. Trimmer stacker cover opens to allow you to take out the finished sets. TU-109A kit connects the Finisher and Trimmer unit. FS-606 Finisher allows the Trimmer unit to be installed.
DO NOT place heavy objects on the trimmer stacker or apply any weight on it, and DO NOT use it for storage. Excessive weight applied to the inside or outside of the trimmer stacker will damage the equipment.
2-14
1 2 3
Trimmer unit knob can be turned to ease removal of mishandled paper. Waste basket holds waste paper cut off from the booklets. Trimmer pressure release lever opens to allow removal of mishandled paper.
2-15
Turning On the Power Switch

To Turn On the Power
1. Turn ON the power switch.
The power switch is located on the left side of the control panel.
The main power switch is located on the upper-left side of the internal main body. Be sure not to use the main power switch in usual operation.
2.
The Wake-up Screen and Warm-up Screens will be displayed.
2-16

A few seconds after the Wake-up Screen appears in the LCD touch screen, seven types of Warm-up Screens will be displayed in succession for approx. 7.0 minutes.
You can set reserve jobs while the machine is warming up. Touch the LCD screen to change the Warm-up Screen to the Basic Screen, then check that the message Ready to copy reserve is displayed on the Basic Screen. See p. 3-12.
3.
The Basic Screen will be displayed.

The message on the Basic Screen will inform you that copying job is now available.
When the initial settings are changed by the Key Operator, the modified conditions will be displayed on the Basic Screen. When Enter E.K.C. password is displayed, enter your password to use the machine. When Set the key counter is displayed, insert the key counter to its inlet on the right side of the main body.
2-17

To Turn Off the Power
1. Turn OFF the power switch.
The power switch is located on the left side of the control panel. The touch screen and all the LEDs on the control panel will go out.
Be sure not to use the main power switch in usual operation.
When the machine is under control of the Weekly Timer function, turning off the power switch will deactivate the function.
2-18

Reducing the Power in Standby Mode (Auto Low Power)
This function automatically lowers the power after a specified period (initially 15 minutes) of copier inactivity. The LCD screen will go off.
The Auto Low Power function can be set to 5 minutes/ 10 minutes/ 15 minutes/ 30 minutes/ 60 minutes/ 90 minutes/ 120 minutes/ 240 minutes in the Key Operator mode. For information about the Key Operator setting, see p. 14-37.
To start a copying job, press any key on the control panel. The Auto low power will be released and the LCD screen recovers usual brightness.
If the Auto Shut-Off function activates at the same time, the power will be turned off without the LCD screen becoming dark. The LCD screen will not go off during a duplex copying job or when the Jam Position Screen is displayed.
2-19

Shutting Off Automatically (Auto Shut-Off)
This function automatically shuts off the power after a specified period (initially 90 minutes) of copier inactivity. To start a copying job, press [POWER SAVER ON/OFF]. The copying operation will become available.
The Auto shut-off can be set for 30 minutes/ 60 minutes/ 90 minutes/ 120 minutes/ 240 minutes in the Key Operator mode. For information about the Key Operator setting, see p. 14-37. When Timer interrupt mode / Enter password is displayed after pressing [POWER SAVER ON/OFF], see p. 8-2 and follow the procedure to continue.
2-20

Shutting Off / Reducing the Power Manually
Follow the procedure below to shut off the power manually.
The machine is initially set to activate the Manual Shut-Off function. The Manual Low Power can be selected in the Key Operator setting. See p. 1438.
1.
Press [POWER SAVER ON/OFF] for one second or longer, then release it.
If Manual Low Power is selected in the Key Operator setting, the machine automatically activates the Low Power mode before releasing [POWER SAVER ON/OFF].
2.
The Shut-Off mode will be activated.

The [POWER SAVER ON/OFF] LED will be lit and all other LEDs and the LCD screen will be turned off.
Be sure to press [POWER SAVER ON/OFF] for one second or longer, otherwise the following message will be displayed and the Shut-Off (Low Power) mode will not be activated. Press POWER SAVER more than one second, then release it for shut off mode Press POWER SAVER continuously more than one second for low power mode
To release the mode, press [POWER SAVER ON/OFF]. The machine will be available for copying operation.
2-21

Entering an EKC Password (EKC)
The Electronic Key Counter (EKC) allows the Key Operator to monitor all copying activities by controlling EKC password accounts. Copy quantity limits for specific accounts can be set. The EKC is not factory-set. An EKC password is required only when the EKC is activated, a User Password is assigned, and Enter E.K.C. password is displayed on the touch screen. Copying will be available by following procedure:
For details of the EKC setting, see p. 14-13 to p. p. 14-20.
1.
Enter EKC password.

Enter your 8-digit EKC password, using the keypad.
To set an EKC password, see p. 14-15.
If an invalid EKC password is entered, continue by entering the correct password.
2.
Press [START].
Your current copy count and copy limit will be displayed for 3 sec.
Current count / limit 018888/025000
3.
Start a copying job.

When the message changes to Ready to copy, copying job is available on the machine.
When your copy count reaches the copy limit, the message Copy limit reached will be displayed. In that case, contact the Key Operator to reset your copy limit.
4.
Press [ACCESS].
The initial state will be restored, with the message Enter E.K.C. password displayed on the screen.
2-22
Loading Paper
Loading Paper
A paper indicator is shown on each tray key of the Basic Screen to indicate the paper level (six levels are provided: ) of the tray. (The Multi-sheet bypass tray displays only when paper in the tray becomes empty.) When paper supply in a tray becomes low, the indicator appears on the tray key, and then it changes to when paper in that tray becomes empty and the tray key blinks on the screen.
Follow the procedure below to supply the empty tray with copy paper.
Each tray key displays a paper type and a number which indicates the paper weight to be loaded. The following paper types are provided: Normal, Recycled, Coloured, High Q, Coated, Colour sp, Tab paper, Exclusive A to J The numbers corresponding to the paper weight are: 1: 64~74 g/m2 2: 75~80 g/m2 3: 81~105 g/m2 4: 106~162 g/m2 5: 163~209 g/m2 6: 210~256 g/m2 (for LCT and Multi-sheet bypass tray only) Key Operator can change this setting. See p. 14-22 for the main body trays and the LCT. See p. 3-20 for the Multi-sheet bypass tray.
Be sure to load only the paper type and weight set for the tray. Using paper with punch holes, copy result may not be satisfactory due to the hole positions. The tray specified as Tab paper is unavailable for Staple, STITCH&FOLD, Fold, or Three-Fold mode.
2-23
Loading Paper
Loading Paper in Tray 1 ,2, and 3
1. Withdraw tray 1, 2, or 3, and open the paper feed roller.
Do not withdraw the tray forcibly; otherwise you may be injured.
Withdraw the tray completely until the green line appears at the left rear side of the tray. Otherwise, the paper feed roller may not open or machine trouble may be caused.
To load the same size as loaded before, proceed to step 4. If changing the paper size, proceed to the next step.
2.
Adjust the position of the side guide plate.

Pull up the lock lever at the front, then slide the side guide plate to the desired position.
See the size indication on the bottom plate of the tray to determine the position of the side guide plate.
Push down the lock lever firmly until it clicks in position in order to fix the side guide plate.
2 2
2-24
Loading Paper
Be sure to fix the side guide plate in position according to the size indication on the tray bottom plate so that the machine can detect the correct paper size.
3.
Adjust the position of the rear stopper.

To slide the rear stopper to the right, hold it at the upper part and slide it while pressing down slightly. On the other hand, hold the rear stopper at the lower part to slide it to the left.
1 2
Be sure to press down the rear stopper when moving it to the right, and also be sure to hold it at the lower part when moving it to the left. Do not move the rear stopper forcibly, otherwise it may be damaged.
4.
Place paper on the tray.

Load paper aligning it to the right side of the tray, then align the rear stopper to the paper.
Be sure that the rear guide plate is securely aligned to the paper; otherwise machine trouble may occur. Do not load above the limit indicated on the side guide plate.
2-25
Loading Paper
5. 6. When paper is seated properly, close the paper feed roller. Gently push in the tray until it locks into place.
The indicator on the tray key will change to .
Do not clam the tray into the main body; otherwise machine trouble may be caused.
2-26
Loading Paper
Loading Paper in Multi-Sheet Bypass Tray
When using the Multi-sheet bypass tray, specify the paper type to be loaded on the tray at the same time. See p. 3-20 for details.
1.
Open the Multi-sheet bypass tray located on the right side of the copier.
1.
Load copy paper, and adjust the paper guides to the paper size.
Stack paper up to 250 sheets 90 g/m2. When loading special paper, do not exceed the limit indicated on the paper guides, otherwise paper misfeed may occur. Do not load paper of the weight less than 64 g/m2, otherwise paper misfeed may occur. The transparency film or ink-jet paper is not available on this machine. Do not load the transparency film or ink-jet paper on the Multi-sheet bypass tray.
2.
When copying is completed, close the Multi-sheet bypass tray.
2-27
Loading Paper
Loading Paper in LCT (LT-211)
Be sure to load only the paper type and weight set for the LCT. Key Operator can change this setting. See p. 14-22.
1.
Open the LCT top door.

The LCT bottom plate will go up.
Without the power turned on, the LCT bottom plate will not function. Be sure to turn on the power switch before loading paper in the LCT.
To load the same size as loaded before, proceed to step 3. If changing the paper size, proceed to the next step.
2.
Adjust the position of the LCT paper guides and rear stopper.
(1) Turn the four LCT paper guide knobs and two rear stopper knobs counterclockwise to loosen them.
2-28
Loading Paper
(2) Move the upper part of the two LCT paper guides to the appropriate positions according to the size indication, then turn the LCT paper guide knobs (two for each) clockwise to fix the guides.
(3)
Move the position of the rear stopper to the appropriate positions according to the size indication on the bottom plate, then turn the two rear stopper knobs clockwise to fix the rear stopper.
3.
Press the paper loading button once, then load the paper into the LCT.
The LCT bottom plate will go down.
2-29
Loading Paper
4. Repeat the step 3 until the bottom plate will not go down any more.
Do not load above the limit indicated on the LCT paper guides. Be sure that the rear stopper is correctly positioned according to the paper size to be loaded; otherwise machine trouble may occur.
5.
Close the LCT top door.
2-30
Loading Paper
Loading Tabbed Sheets in Tray 1, 2, or 3
When TAB is displayed on the tray key of the Basic Screen, follow the procedure below to supply the tray with tabbed sheets.
The tray paper type can be specified in the Key Operator setting. For details, see p. 14-22.
Example: 3 Tabbed sheets loaded in position for one finished set. Printed side 1st TAB 2nd TAB 3rd TAB
Rear
Front
ONE FINISHED SET Rear Example: 9 Tabbed sheets loaded in position for 3 finished sets. 1st TAB Front Printed side 3rd TABS 2nd TAB
1st TABS 2nd TABS
3rd TAB THREE FINISHED SETS
The tab extension width must be 12.5 mm or less.
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Withdraw tray 1, 2, or 3. Open the paper feed roller. Place the tabbed sheets on the tray as illustrated above. Move the green levers (located at the front and the left side) to the edge of the paper. Close the paper feed roller, then push in the tray until it locks into place.
2-31
Loading Paper
Loading Tabbed Sheets in LCT (LT-211)
Example: 3 Tabbed sheets loaded in position for one finished set. Rear Printed side Front 3rd TAB ONE FINISHED SET Example: 9 Tabbed sheets loaded in position for 3 finished sets. 1st TAB 2nd TAB 1st TAB 2nd TAB Rear Printed side Front 3rd TAB 3rd TAB THREE FINISHED SETS 1st TAB 2nd TAB 1st TAB 2nd TAB 3rd TAB
The tab extension width must be 12.5 mm or less. To load the tabbed sheets into LCT, contact your service representative to position the rear stopper for the paper size to be loaded.
1. 2. 3. 4.
Open the LCT top door. Press the paper loading button to lower the LCT bottom plate. Load the tabbed sheets into the LCT as illustrated above. Close the LCT top door.
2-32
Loading Paper
Loading Tabbed Sheets in Multi-Sheet Bypass Tray
Example: 3 Tabbed sheets loaded in position for one finished set. Rear Printed side 1st TAB 2nd TAB 3rd TAB 1st TAB 2nd TAB 3rd TAB ONE FINISHED SET Example: 9 Tabbed sheets loaded in position for 3 finished sets. 1st TAB 2nd TAB 1st TAB 2nd TAB 3rd TAB Printed side
Rear
Front
3rd TAB THREE FINISHED SETS
The tab extension width must be 12.5 mm or less.
1. 2. 3. 4.
Open the Multi-sheet bypass tray located on the right side of the copier. Load tabbed sheets as illustrated above. Adjust the paper guides to the paper size. Specify the paper type as TAB for the Multi-sheet bypass tray.
See p. 3-20 for specifying the paper type of the Multi-sheet bypass tray.
2-33
Loading Paper
2-34
Copying Operations
How to Make a Basic Copy
Selecting Colour Mode ........................................................................3-2 Positioning Originals ............................................................................3-4 Setting Print Quantity.........................................................................3-10 Setting Job During Warm-up .............................................................3-12 To Stop Scanning/Printing .................................................................3-15 Selecting Paper Size..........................................................................3-16 Copying Using Special Paper (Multi-Sheet Bypass Tray) ..................3-20 Selecting Magnification Ratio (Lens Mode) .......................................3-25 Making Double-Sided Copies (1)2, 2)2) .........................................3-28 Making Single-Sided Copies from Double-Sided Originals (2)1) .....3-36 To Scan Originals into Memory (Store Mode) ....................................3-38 To Set Next Copying Job (Reserve) ...................................................3-40 To Check/Control Jobs in Progress (Job Status Screen)...................3-43 Output Mode for Machine without Finisher .......................................3-46 Output Mode for Machine with Finisher ............................................3-50 Selecting Binding Mode.....................................................................3-59
Selecting Colour Mode

The following four colour modes are available: AUTO mode detects whether the scanned original is coloured or black-and-white image, and automatically selects either FULL COLOUR mode or BLACK mode for copying. FULL COLOUR mode makes full-coloured copies whether the original image is coloured or not. BLACK mode makes black-and-white copies whether the original image is coloured or not. SINGLE COLOUR mode copies in one colour to be selected from red, green, blue, magenta, cyan, or yellow. The FULL COLOUR mode is initially selected. Follow the procedure below to change the Colour mode.
Specification for Colour Mode

/ A colour mode is incompatible with another colour mode. / Incompatible with AUTO: Tab Paper, Fold/Stitch&Fold/Trimming (with Booklet selected), Combination, Booklet, Overlay, Overlay Memory / Incompatible with FULL COLOUR: Tab Paper / Incompatible with SINGLE COLOUR: Tab Paper The colour adjustment function is provided on this machine. See Section 7: "Colour Image Adjustment".
Some adjustments cannot be made in the BLACK mode and SINGLE COLOUR mode. Incompatible with BLACK: Hue/Saturation/Brightness in Colour Adjust, Colour Balance, Any function except Auto in Screen, Colour/Text of Image Judge in Others, Original Type in Special Original Incompatible with SINGLE COLOUR: Hue/Saturation/Brightness in Colour Adjust, Colour Balance, Colour/Text of Image Judge in Others, Original Type in Special Original
1.
Touch a mode key under the COLOUR MODE on the Basic Screen to select the desired Colour mode.
3-2
When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then press [AUTO RESET].
FULL COLOUR is already highlighted when the initial settings are restored.
The initial settings may have been altered by Key Operator. See p. 14-11 for details.
Selecting SINGLE COLOUR will display the popup menu to specify a colour.
Touch the desired colour key, then touch OK. The selected colour will be indicated under the COLOUR MODE indication of the Basic Screen, with the SINGLE COLOUR key highlighted.
Touch CANCEL to restore the previous setting.
2.
Select additional copy conditions, as desired.

If the colour adjustment is desired, see Section 7: "Colour Image Adjustment".
3.
Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.
See p. 3-10 for details on setting print quantity.
4.
Position original(s).
See p. 3-4 for details on positioning originals.
5.
Press [START].
3-3
Positioning Originals
Set the originals in the RADF or on the platen glass to copy.
Positioning Originals in RADF

The document feeder (RADF) automatically feeds up to 100 originals directly to the platen area, starting with the top sheet. The RADF should only be used for unstapled, smooth, flat originals.
See p. 12-11 for details of the original sizes available in the RADF.
Positioning originals in Normal mode
1. 2.
Arrange originals in order. Position original(s) FACE UP in the document feeder tray.
Place two-sided originals with page one FACE UP. The direction of the originals should conform to the Original direction icon displayed at the upper left corner of the Basic Screen. Up to 100 originals can be set at a time.
The copy result may not be satisfactory if the originals are set in wrong direction. Be sure that the originals are set in the same direction as indicated by the Original direction icon, especially when making doublesided copies or using Staple, Stitch&Fold, Fold, or Booklet mode. See p. 9-2 for details. Be sure not to use unsuitable RADF originals. See p. 12-10 for details. Do not set more than 100 originals or over the limit indicated on the paper guides; otherwise a paper misfeed will occur to cause damage to the originals.
3-4
Before placing originals in the tray, be sure the document feeder is closed fully. Once closed, do not open the document feeder, otherwise the selected copy conditions may be altered automatically.
3.
Adjust paper guides.
Positioning originals in Mixed original mode Mixed size originals can be copied together from the document feeder.
To use the Mixed original mode, see procedure on p. 9-9. See p. 12-11 for available combinations of mixed originals.
1.
Arrange originals in order.

Arrange the mixed size originals as illustrated below.
To the depth
To the left
Setting direction
3-5
2. Position mixed originals FACE UP, aligned with the left rear side of the document feeder tray.
Place two-sided originals with page one FACE UP. Up to 100 originals can be set at a time.
Be sure not to use unsuitable RADF originals. See p. 12-10 for details. Do not set more than 100 originals or over the limit indicated on the paper guides; otherwise a paper misfeed will occur to cause damage to the originals.
3.
3-6
Positioning originals in Z-Folded original mode Z-Folded original mode detects the folded original size without using the size detection sensor of the RADF.
To use the Z-Folded original mode, see procedure on p. 9-12. See p. 12-11 for available sizes of folded originals.
1. 2.
Arrange originals in order. Position original(s) FACE UP in the document feeder tray.
Place two-sided originals with page one FACE UP. Up to 100 originals can be set at a time.
Be sure not to use unsuitable RADF originals. See p. 12-10 for details. Do not set more than 100 originals or over the limit indicated on the paper guides; otherwise a paper misfeed will occur to cause damage to the originals.
3.
3-7
Positioning Original on Platen Glass
Use the platen glass when originals are not suitable for use with the document feeder, e.g., when size is incompatible, or when originals are folded, stapled, torn, or in generally poor condition.
1. 2.
Raise the document feeder or platen cover. Place original FACE DOWN in the left rear corner.
The direction of the original should conform to the Original direction icon displayed at the upper left corner of the Basic Screen.
The copy result may not be satisfactory if the original is set in wrong direction. Be sure that the original is set in the same direction as indicated by the Original direction icon, especially when making double-sided copies or using Staple, Stitch&Fold, Fold, or Booklet mode. See p. 9-2 for details.
3.
Gently close the document feeder or platen cover to prevent the original from shifting on the glass.
3-8
When selecting Dual Page, Non-Image Area Erase, AUTO mode in Repeat, or AUTO Layout, DO NOT CLOSE the document feeder. For details on each function, see Section 10: "Applications".
Do not place too heavy originals, or do not press strongly when thick original is placed and is under pressure of RADF; otherwise the glass may be broken and you may be injured.
3-9
Setting Print Quantity

This section describes how to set or change print quantity.
To Set Print Quantity

The copier is initially set to copy the original set in amounts determined by the print quantity setting, then outputs sorted sets.
1.
Entered quantity will be displayed on the touch panel.
3-10

To Change Print Quantity
Follow the procedure below to change the print quantity that has been already entered.
1.
Press [C (CLEAR QTY.)].
The quantity displayed on the touch panel will return to 1.
2.
Enter the correct quantity.

Entered quantity will be displayed on the touch panel.
3-11
Setting Job During Warm-up

While the copier is warming up after power is turned on, select copy conditions and start scanning so that the copier may start printing immediately when the copier engine is ready.
1.
Turn on the power switch of the machine.

Seven types of Warm-up Screens display in succession.
See p. 2-16 for details on turning on the power switch.
2.
Touch the LCD panel to change the Warm-up Screen to the Basic Screen.
Check that the message Ready to copy reserve is displayed on the Basic Screen.
3.
Set the desired copying conditions, and enter the print quantity.
3-12

4. Position original(s) FACE UP in the RADF or FACE DOWN on the platen glass.
5.
Press [START].
The original for the job will be scanned, and the highlighted FREE JOB folder key will change to SCAN JOB. When scanning is completed, SCAN JOB will change to RESERVE JOB, and the next FREE JOB becomes active.
6.
If setting more than one reserve job, touch the next FREE JOB to highlight it.
3-13

7. Set the desired copying conditions, enter the print quantity, position original(s), then press [START].
Up to 9 reserve jobs can be prepared. Copying on the reserve job will start automatically after completing the warmup.
The Job Status Screen allows you to alter the output order of the reserve jobs or to delete the reserve job. See p. 3-43. If all three reserve job keys are used, touch the active FREE JOB key at the far right to scroll. See p. 3-40. To stop printing, press [STOP]. See p. 3-15 for details.
3-14
To Stop Scanning/Printing
To Stop Scanning/Printing
Follow the procedure below to stop scanning or printing.
1. 2.
Touch to highlight SCAN JOB or PRINT JOB to be suspended. Press [STOP].
The current machine operation of the selected job will be suspended.

If wrong job is suspended, touch CONTINUE on the popup menu immediately, select the correct job, then press [STOP] to suspend it.
3.
Touch EXIT to cancel the job.

All the data of the selected job will be deleted.
To restart the suspended job, touch CONTINUE on the popup menu.
3-15
Selecting Paper Size

To select an appropriate paper size for getting your desired copy result, use APS (Automatic Paper Selection), or select paper size manually on the touch screen, as required.
To Select Paper Size Automatically (APS)

APS detects the size of originals placed on the RADF or platen glass and automatically selects and feeds copy paper of the same size, or selects an appropriate size according to the magnification ratio selected.
APS is not available when using non-standard size or wide size paper.
1.
Touch to highlight APS under the PAPER SIZE on the Basic Screen.
2. 3.
Select additional copy conditions, as desired. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.
4.
See p. 12-10 for the original sizes detectable from the RADF or on the platen glass. Detectable original sizes can be changed from AB sizes to inch sizes, only A sizes, or AB sizes and inch sizes mixed. See p. 14-38. See p. 3-4 for details on positioning originals. Key Operator can deactivate APS when the original is set in the RADF or on the platen glass. See p. 14-38.
5.
Press [START].
Scanned image will be printed on the paper size automatically selected.
3-16
If the appropriate copy paper is not loaded in any tray, no copying will be performed, and a message will prompt you to load the appropriate paper. Copy result may not be satisfactory due to the Rotation function. In this case, turn the function OFF manually. See. p. 8-4. See the table below for the relation of original size, magnification ratio and copy paper size.
Paper size Original size Paper size
Magnification
Magnification
3-17

To Specify Desired Paper Size (AMS)
When a paper size is specified on the touch screen, an appropriate reduction or enlargement ratio will be selected automatically according to the original size detected from the RADF or the platen glass.
Wide paper size can be specified when AMS is in use. In this case, the same magnification ratio as that of the standard size will be selected automatically.
1.
Touch a tray key on the Basic Screen to select the desired paper size.
Selected tray key will be highlighted, and under the LENS MODE the AMS key will also be highlighted.
If copying in 1.000 (100%) magnification mode and specifying a paper size, see p. 3-25.
2. 3.
4.
See p. 12-10 for the original sizes detectable from the RADF or on the platen glass. See p. 3-4 for details on positioning originals.
5.
Press [START].
Scanned image will be printed on the specified paper size in the magnification ratio automatically selected.
3-18
Copy result may not be satisfactory due to the Rotation function. In this case, turn the function OFF manually. See. p. 8-4. See the table below for the relation of original size, copy paper size, and magnification ratio automatically selected.
Original size
Paper size
3-19
Copying Using Special Paper (Multi-Sheet Bypass Tray)

Use the Multi-sheet bypass tray to copy using special (non-standard) paper. Select the special paper type and weight from the selections previously specified by the Key Operator, then select the size to be loaded on the Multi-sheet bypass tray, as described below.
Transparency cannot be used on this machine. DO NOT load the transparencies into the Multi-sheet bypass tray.
8.5x11R and B6R sizes (unavailable in Tray 1 to 4) can be used in the Multi-sheet bypass tray. Also, 210~256 g/m2 paper can be used in the Multi-sheet bypass tray. To specify the combinations of special paper type and weight to be selected for the Multi-sheet bypass tray, see p. 14-24. To specify the special paper type, weight and size in Tray 1 to 4 to be used on a regular basis, see p. 14-22.
1.
Open the Multi-sheet bypass tray, and load the copy paper.
See p. 2-27 for further details of loading procedure. For the specifications of paper in the Multi-sheet bypass tray, see p. 12-2.
2.
Touch the Multi-sheet bypass tray key in the PAPER SIZE area of the Basic Screen to highlight it.
The TYPE/SIZE key will appear under the bypass tray key, APS will be deselected, and AMS will be highlighted on the Basic Screen.
3.
Touch TYPE/SIZE.
The Paper Type/Size popup menu will be displayed.
3-20

4. Select the paper type and weight.
To select the paper type and weight:
Select the desired one out of the six keys on the menu to highlight it.
If the desired paper type and weight cannot be found on the popup menu, specify it in the Key Operator mode. See p. 14-24 for details. When selecting Tab Paper as the special paper type to copy onto the tabbed paper including the tab part, specify the original paper type as Tab Paper on the Special Original popup menu. See p. 9-4.
If no paper type and weight indication is needed, touch the highlighted key to clear the selection of the six keys. The selected paper type and number indicating the paper weight will appear on the bypass tray key of the Basic Screen.
5.
Specify the paper size.

When using a standard size, touch STD size to highlight it.
When using a special size, specify the paper size as follows.
3-21

To select the STD size (special):
Touch STD size (special) to display the popup menu, then use arrow keys to scroll to the desired size. To select the Non STD size:
Touch Non STD size to display the popup menu, touch the vertical or horizontal size key to highlight it, then use the keypad on the popup menu to enter the vertical/horizontal size, or use arrows to scroll to that number.
3-22

To select the Wide size paper:
Touch Wide size paper to display the popup menu, use arrow keys to scroll to the desired wide size, then touch Lead edge or Rear edge to select the paper dimensions corresponding to the wide paper sizes entered.
Touch Input size to display the Input Size popup menu, touch the vertical or horizontal size key to highlight it, then use the keypad on the popup menu to enter the vertical/horizontal size, or use arrow keys to scroll to that number. The entered number should fall within the range from the vertical/horizontal size of the standard size corresponding to the selected wide size, to a maximum of 330 mm/487 mm.
When selecting Wide size paper, be sure to specify the actual size of the wide size paper to be loaded. Wide paper size information is not initially input in this machine.
6.
Touch OK.
The Basic Screen will be restored. The bypass tray key shows the specified size, paper type and the number indicating paper weight, and is highlighted along with the TYPE/SIZE key.
When the STD size (special) or Wide size paper is selected, the size specified on the popup menu will be indicated on the bypass tray key. When Non STD size is selected, the SPECIAL indication will appear instead.
3-23

7. 8. Select additional copy conditions, as desired. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.
9.
Position original(s) FACE UP in the document feeder or FACE DOWN on the platen glass.
See p. 3-4 for details on positioning originals. See p. 9-6 for details on positioning non-standard size or tabbed paper originals.
10. Press [START].
3-24
Selecting Magnification Ratio (Lens Mode)

When the copier is turned ON, the magnification ratio is set to 1.000 (100%) automatically on the Basic Screen. Follow each procedure described in this section to select the desired magnification ratio.
To Copy in 1.000 Magnification Mode

Follow this procedure to make a 100% copy of the original image.
1.
Close the RADF securely, then press [AUTO RESET].
The initial settings are restored. Check that APS is highlighted to indicate that the 1.000 magnification is selected.
The initial settings may be altered by the Key Operator. See p. 14-11.
2.

Specifying paper size will release 1.000 magnification and set AMS automatically. In this case, touch 1:1 to highlight it again.
3.
4.
5.
Press [START].
3-25

To Change Magnification Ratio (Fixed Magnification / Zoom Mode)
Use the 8 preset ratios (0.500, 0.707, 0.816, 0.866, 1.154, 1.224, 1.414, 2.000) and 3 user preset ratios to increase or decrease magnification in fixed amounts, or use the Zoom mode to reduce or enlarge the copied original image in 0.1% (0.001) increments.
Specification for Fixed Magnification / Zoom Mode

/ Incompatible Conditions: AMS, Repeat mode in Repeat, Reduce & Shift in Image Shift See p. 8-6 for Vertical/Horizontal Zoom mode.
1.
Touch ZOOM on the Basic Screen.

The popup menu for changing magnification ratio will be displayed.
2.
Specify the desired magnification ratio.

To select a preset or user preset ratio:
Touch the desired preset or userset ratio key in the RE area to highlight it, then touch OK.
To restore the previous setting, touch CANCEL.
The selected ratio will be displayed on the Basic Screen.
3-26

To specify a zoom ratio:
Touch the Vertical/Horizontal zoom key in the ZOOM area to highlight it. Use the keypad on the popup menu to enter the desired magnification ratio, then touch OK. The selected ratio will be displayed on the Basic Screen.
The magnification ratio should be a 4-digit number. Start with 0 if the magnification ratio is under 1.000. If an incorrect ratio is entered, continue by entering the correct ratio. Use the upper arrow (+) to enlarge, or the lower arrow (,) to reduce the ratio in 0.1% (0.001) increments. To restore the previous setting, touch CANCEL.
3. 4.
5.
6.
Press [START].
3-27
Making Double-Sided Copies (1)2, 2)2)

The Basic Screen is initially set to 1)1 copy mode to make single-sided copies from single-sided originals. Follow the procedure below to make double-sided copies from the originals scanned from the document feeder or from the platen glass.
Using RADF
Select the copy mode according to the original type (single-sided or double-sided).
Specifications for Double-Sided Copying Using RADF

/ See p. 12-10 for the information on unsuitable RADF originals. / Incompatible Conditions: Face Up, Multi-Page Enlargement, Non-Image Area Erase, Verti./Horiz. mode or Auto mode of Repeat, AUTO Layout, Storing Image in Overlay Memory
2-2 Copying
Double-sided original 1-2 Copying
Duplex copy
Single-sided original
Duplex copy
1.
Touch 1 )2 or 2 )2 on the Basic Screen to highlight it.
3-28
2.
Check and specify the original set direction and binding mode.
The Original direction icon is located at the upper left corner of the Basic Screen. To change the original set direction, touch SPECIAL ORIGINAL on the Basic Screen to display the Special Original popup menu, then touch the desired original direction key to highlight it.
If the originals are upside down on the reverse side and you want to make copies of the same direction on both sides, touch TOP BIND. With this feature specified, next step is not needed. Proceed to step 4. Touch OK to return to the Basic Screen.
3-29

3. Select the binding mode.
Touch OUTPUT MENU on the Basic Screen to display the Output Mode popup menu, then touch the desired binding mode key to highlight it.
Selecting TOP BIND will make copies upside down on the reverse side, while RIGHT&LEFT BIND copies normally.
Copies Binding mode
Touch OK to return to the Basic Screen.
4.

Some incompatible conditions may automatically release the selected copy mode. In this case, arrange the settings so that they are compatible with the selected copy mode.
3-30

5. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.
6.
Position originals FACE UP in the document feeder according to the original direction.
See p. 3-4 for details on positioning originals. Use RADF store mode (p. 3-38) when the original count exceeds 100.
7.
Press [START].
The machine starts to scan originals, then prints duplex copies when ready for output.
Press [STOP] to suspend the scanning or printing job. See p. 3-15 for details.
When the finisher / trimmer unit / paper exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur.
3-31

Using Platen Glass
Use the platen glass to scan originals unsuitable for the document feeder.
Specification for Double-Sided Copying Using Platen Glass

/ Use the Platen store mode. / See p. 12-10 for the information on unsuitable RADF originals. / Incompatible Conditions: Face Up, Image Insert, Multi-Page Enlargement, Storing Image in Overlay Memory
1.
Check and specify the original set direction and binding mode.
If the originals are upside down on the reverse side and you want to make copies of the same direction on both sides, touch TOP BIND. With this feature specified, next step is not needed. Proceed to step 3. Touch OK to return to the Basic Screen.
3-32

2. Select the binding mode.
Touch OUTPUT MENU on the Basic Screen to display the Output Mode popup menu, then touch the desired binding mode key to highlight it.
Selecting TOP BIND will make copies upside down on the reverse side, while RIGHT&LEFT BIND copies normally.
Copies Binding mode
3.
Position original FACE DOWN on the platen glass according to the original direction, then close the document feeder or platen cover.
Be sure to start from the first page.
See p. 12-10 for paper sizes detectable on the platen glass. See p. 3-8 for details on positioning originals. Use Non-Image Area Erase to prevent the black copy marks to be produced when scanning the original with the document feeder or platen cover open. See p. 10-34.
3-33

4. Touch 1)2 on the Basic Screen to highlight it.
The STORE key will be automatically highlighted on the screen.
DO NOT press [AUTO RESET] at this point, otherwise the platen mode will be released to disable the copier from scanning the original placed on the platen glass.
5.

Some incompatible conditions may automatically release the selected copy mode. In this case, arrange the settings so that they are compatible with the selected copy mode.
6.
7. 8.
Press [START] to scan.

The front side image of the double-sided copy will be scanned into memory.
Replace the original on the platen glass with the back side image original, then press [START].
Repeat this step until all originals are scanned.
Memory indicator on the upper right of the Basic Screen allows you to check the remaining memory. To delete the scanned data without printing, press [STOP]. See p. 3-15 for details.
9.
After all originals are scanned, touch STORE to exit the Store mode.
STORE will no longer be highlighted.
10. Press [START] to print.

All the data in memory will be output.
3-34
Press [STOP] to suspend the printing job. See p. 3-15 for details.
3-35
Making Single-Sided Copies from Double-Sided Originals
Making Single-Sided Copies from DoubleSided Originals (2)1)

Use RADF and select 2)1 copy mode to make single-sided copies from doublesided originals.
Specification for Single-Sided Copying from Double-Sided Originals

/ See p. 12-10 for the information on unsuitable RADF originals. / Incompatible Conditions: Fold/Stitch&Fold/Trimming (with Booklet selected), Tab Paper, Chapter, Booklet, Multi-Page Enlargement, Non-Image Area Erase, Repeat (except 2/4/8 Repeat), AUTO Layout, Storing Image in Overlay Memory
2-1 Copying
Double-sided original
Simplex copy
1.
Touch 2 )1 on the Basic Screen to highlight it.
3-36
Making Single-Sided Copies from Double-Sided Originals

2. Check and specify the original set direction and binding mode.
If double-sided originals are upside down on the reverse side and you want to make single-sided copies of the same direction, touch TOP BIND. Touch OK to return to the Basic Screen.
3. 4.
5.
Position originals FACE UP in the document feeder.

6.
Press [START].
The machine starts to scan originals, then prints simplex copies when ready for output.
3-37
To Scan Originals into Memory (Store Mode)

Store mode allows you to scan all the originals first, then to start a continuous printing job. Use RADF store mode to scan a large amount of originals. Use Platen store mode for originals that cannot be fed through the document feeder due to thickness, size or condition. These two modes can be used in combination.
RADF tray capacity is 100; however, more than 100 originals can be scanned into memory using RADF store mode.
Specification for Store Mode

/ Incompatible with RADF store mode: Image Insert, Storing image in Overlay Memory
1.
Make copying selections, as desired.

2.
Touch STORE on the Basic Screen to highlight it.
3.
4.
Using platen glass: Place original FACE DOWN. Start scanning from the first page.
When Dual Page, Non-Image Area Erase, Auto detection mode of Repeat, or AUTO Layout is selected, keep the RADF open throughout the scanning procedure.
3-38

Using RADF: Position originals with page one FACE UP. Up to 100 originals can be loaded. If the number of originals exceeds 100, divide them into blocks not exceeding 100 sheets and load them beginning with the block with the first page. Be sure to check the original direction according to the Original direction icon displayed at the upper left corner of the Basic Screen.
The copy result may not be satisfactory if the originals are set in wrong direction. Be sure that the originals are set in the same direction as indicated by the Original direction icon, especially when making double-sided copies or using Staple, Stitch & Fold, Fold, or Booklet mode. See p. 9-2 for details.
5.

Repeat steps 4 and 5 until all originals are scanned. Memory indicator on the upper right of the Basic Screen allows you to check the remaining memory. To delete the scanned data without printing, press [STOP]. See p. 3-15 for details. See p. 5-11 if memory overflow occurs. Should memory overflow occur frequently, it is recommended that you contact your service representative to expand the memory capacity in your machine.
6. 7.
Touch STORE to exit the Store mode.

STORE will no longer be highlighted.
Press [START].
All the data in memory will be output.
3-39
To Set Next Copying Job (Reserve)

The Reserve function allows you to set up a new job while a current job is in process. When the current job is finished, the Reserve job starts printing immediately.
Specifications for Reserve

/ Job settings: Max. 10 (current job plus 9 reserve jobs) / When the current job is in Store mode, Image Insert, or Dual Page, the reserve job setting will be available after the copier starts to print the current job. / Incompatible Conditions: Interrupt copying, Scanning in Store mode, Proof copy, Storing image in Overlay Memory
1.
Press [START] to start scanning/printing for the current job.

FREE JOB will become active to show that the reserve job setting is now available.
2.
Touch FREE JOB to highlight it.

The Reserve Job Setting Screen will be displayed.
On the Reserve Job Setting Screen, all keys on the LCD and control panel will function for the reserve job.
3-40

3. Select copy conditions for the reserve job, as desired.
When trouble occurs while setting the reserve job, the PRINT or SCAN JOB key on the Basic Screen will change to JAM or ADD PAPER key. See p. 5-7.
4.
Position original(s) after completing the scan for the current job.
To cancel the reserve job, touch STATUS on the Basic Screen to display the Job Status Screen. See p. 3-43 for details.
5.
Press [START] to start scanning for the reserve job.
Up to 10 jobs (current job included) can be set.

When setting more than one reserve job, the next reserve job setting will be available after the copier starts to scan for the previous reserve job.
To set the fourth copying job, touch the active FREE JOB key at the far right to scroll to the next reserve setting screen. Another three reserve job settings (0406) will be available.
To set the seventh copying job, touch the active FREE JOB key at the far right to scroll to the next reserve setting screen.
3-41
The number of reserve jobs including current job will be indicated in the middle of the message area.
When completed, the Basic Screen for the current printing job will be restored. To scroll to the next/previous screen, touch the arrow keys displayed at the right side of the folder keys.
When trouble occurs on a reserve job which is not currently displayed on the screen, the arrow key to scroll to that job will blink. See p. 5-7.
6.
Copying of the reserve job will start automatically after completing the current job.
3-42
To Check/Control Jobs in Progress (Job Status Screen)

The Job Status Screen allows you to perform the following functions. Confirm machine status Delete reserve job View noncomplete job list Change order of reserve job View previous job list
Not only the copy reserve jobs but the print jobs made in Printer mode can also be checked and controlled on this screen.
1.
Touch STATUS on the Basic Screen.

The Job Status Screen will be displayed. Check the current status of the machine.
See p. 3-43 for details of the screen.
2.
Perform the desired setting on the screen.
To change the order of reserve job: Touch to highlight the desired reserve job key, then touch JOB PRIORITY. The highlighted reserve job is advanced by one in printing order unless the job preceding the selected one is already in progress.
If more than six jobs are entered, use the page down arrow key at the lower left corner of the screen to scroll to the desired job.
3-43

To clear reserve job: Touch to highlight the desired reserve job key, then touch JOB CLEAR. Touch YES to clear the highlighted reserve job, or NO to cancel.
To check user name (print jobs only): Touch USER NAME CHECK to display the User Name Check Screen. Check the user name indicated on the right side of the job number and operation mode. Touch OK to return to the Job Status Screen. To display previous job list: Touch PREVIOUS JOB LIST to display the Previous Job List Screen. Touch to scroll to the next page. Up to 16 previous jobs (4 pages) can be displayed. Touch to return to the previous page. Touch OK to return to the Job Status Screen. To display noncomplete job list: Touch NONCOMPLETE JOB LIST to display the Noncomplete Job List Screen. Touch to scroll to the next page. Up to 16 noncomplete jobs (4 pages) can be displayed. Touch to return to the previous page. Touch OK to return to the Job Status Screen.
3.
Touch OK on the Job Status Screen.

The Basic Screen will be restored.
3-44

Contents of Job Status Screen NO.: MODE: Displays the No. (01-99) for each job assigned to the machine. Displays the machines current mode of operation. Three modes are listed below. COPIER PRINTER SCANNER STATUS: Displays the current status of the machine for each job. READY: INTERRUPT: READY: PRINTING: NO PAPER: STOP: RESERVE: JAM: TOTAL PAGE(s): Ready to use in each mode Interrupting the previous job Error in each mode Printing in each mode No paper in copy/print mode Stop in each mode Ready to reserve Jam in each mode
Displays the number of scanned pages for each job. (0 to 9999) Displays the remaining copy count of the job. 0 to 9999 (The number exceeding 9999 will be displayed as 9999^.) Copy count = No. of scanned pages x Print quantity
PAGE(s) TO GO:
MINUTE(s) TO GO: Displays the time (in minutes) required for completing the job. Exceeding 999 minutes: 999^ Shorter than 1 minute: <1 Other: The following message will be displayed on the bar when the reserved job does not exist.
RESERVED JOB DOES NOT EXIST
3-45
Output Mode for Machine without Finisher

This section describes the output modes for a copier without the Finisher. The Non-sort mode is initially selected. 1 2 Non-sort mode copies the original set in amounts determined by the print quantity setting, then outputs sorted sets normally. Rotation sort mode rotates every other sorted sets by 90 upon exit, provided the same paper size is loaded in two trays, one tray with paper loaded in portrait orientation and the other tray with paper loaded in landscape orientation, e.g., A4 and A4R. Group mode copies each original page in amounts determined by the print quantity setting, then outputs grouped sets normally. Rotation group mode rotates every other grouped set by 90 upon exit, provided the same paper size is loaded in two trays, one tray with paper loaded in portrait orientation and the other tray with paper loaded in landscape orientation, e.g., A4 and A4R.
3 4
Using Face up mode in combination with the above four modes, simplex copies exit face up on the exit tray.
Originals Example: 3-set copies Face down non-sort (default) Face down rotation sort Face down group Face down rotation group
Face up non-sort
Face up rotation sort
Face up group
Face up rotation group
3-46

Specification for Output Modes without Finisher
/ Incompatible with Group mode: Proof Copy, Sheet/Cover Insertion, Chapter, Combination, Booklet, Image Insert, Program Job, Repeat, AUTO Layout, Non-Image Area Erase, Stamp (Numbering) / Incompatible with Rotation Group mode: Proof Copy, Mixed Original, ZFolded Original, Non STD Size (FULL AREA), Sheet/Cover Insertion, Chapter, Combination, Booklet, Image Insert, Dual Page, Program Job, Repeat, AUTO Layout, Non-Image Area Erase, Stamp (Numbering), Overlay / Incompatible with Rotation Sort mode: Mixed Original, Sheet/Cover Insertion, Booklet, Repeat, AUTO Layout, Non-Image Area Erase
1.
Load copy paper.

When using Rotation sort or Rotation group mode, load the same paper size into two trays in different orientation.
Do not release the Rotation function. When starting a new copying job, be sure to close the RADF securely, then press [AUTO RESET].
2.
Select the desired output mode.

To select Face down non-sort mode: Confirm that OUTPUT MENU is not highlighted on the Basic Screen.
Face down non-sort mode is initially selected. Key Operator can change the initial output mode. See p. 14-11.
3-47

To select Group, Rotation group, Rotation sort or Face up mode: Touch OUTPUT MENU on the Basic Screen to display the Output Mode popup menu, then touch the desired mode key to highlight it. To use Face up mode in combination, simply touch FACE UP to highlight it.
3.
Touch OK on the Output Mode popup menu.

The Basic Screen will be restored with the output icon indicating the Output mode currently selected.
Touch CANCEL on the Output Mode popup menu to restore the previous setting.
Touch RECALL STANDARD to restore the initial setting. See the next page for details of the output icons displayed on the Basic Screen.
4. 5.
The exit tray capacity is 120 sheets. Be sure that the capacity is not exceeded.
6.
7.
Press [START].
3-48
When the paper exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur.
Output Icons on the Basic Screen
Face Down Non-sort Rotation sort Group Rotation group
Face Up Non-sort Rotation sort Group Rotation group
3-49
Output Mode for Machine with Finisher

Finisher FS-513/FS-606 is equipped with a primary (main) and a secondary (sub) exit trays. Without using any optional equipment, each exit tray provides the output modes as described below.
When the Memory switch No. 58 "Finisher operating (Thick)" of the Key Operator mode is set to prefer image quality, copy speed may become maximum one-sixth lower depending upon the paper type or specified output mode. For more detailed information, contact your service representative.
Primay (Main) Tray: 1 2 3 4 Non-sort mode simply means that the offset-stacker finisher modes are not selected. Copies will be stacked upon exit without being offset by sorted sets. Sort mode outputs multiple copies of the original set, having each sorted set offset by 30mm upon exit. Staple mode offsets and staples each sorted set. Up to 50 sheets (or within 5mm thick) can be stapled. Group mode groups together multiple copies of each original and offsets the sets by 30mm upon exit.
Using Face up mode in combination with the above four modes, simplex copies exit face up on the exit tray.
Example: Make 3 copied sets from 4 original sheets
Non-sort
Sort
Staple-sort
Group
Offset by 30mm
1 oblique staple
Offset by 30mm
3-50

Secondary (Sub) Tray: 1 2 3 4
.
Example: Make 3 copied sets Face down non-sort Face down group Face up non-sort Face up group
Face down non-sort exit outputs simplex copies and odd numbered duplex copies face down, without offsetting the sorted sets. Face down group exit outputs multiple copies of each original face down, without offsetting the grouped sets upon exit. Face up non-sort exit outputs simplex copies and odd numbered duplex copies face up, without offsetting the sorted sets. Face up group exit outputs multiple copies of each original face up, without offsetting the grouped sets upon exit
The copier is initially set to output to Primary (main) tray in Sort mode. Follow the procedure on the next page to change the output mode, as desired.
See Section 8: "Advanced Information" for the output modes using Finisher options.
3-51

Specification for Output Modes with Finisher
/ Incompatible with Sort mode: Using platen glass (unless Image Insert, Dual Page, or Platen store mode is used), Fold, Stitch & Fold, Three-Fold, Trimming, / Incompatible with Staple mode: Using platen glass (unless Image Insert, Dual Page, or Platen store mode is used), Fold, Stitch & Fold, Three-Fold, Trimming
Using excessively curled paper or some types of thin paper in Staple mode may cause poor results in arrangement of the stapled sets. / Incompatible with Group mode: 1)2 or 2)2 mode using platen glass (unless Platen store mode is used), Proof Copy, Fold, Stitch & Fold, Three-Fold, Trimming, Sheet/Cover Insertion, Chapter, Combination, Booklet, Image Insert, Repeat / Incompatible with Group using Secondary (sub) tray: 1)2 or 2)2 mode using platen glass (unless Platen store mode is used), Proof Copy, Fold, Stitch & Fold, Three-Fold, Trimming, Punch, Cover sheet feeding, Sheet/Cover Insertion, Chapter, Combination, Booklet, Image Insert, Repeat / Incompatible with Face Up exit: 1)2 or 2)2 mode using platen glass, Fold, Stitch & Fold, Three-Fold, Trimming, Cover sheet feeding
1.
Close the RADF securely, then press [AUTO RESET].

Check that the Sort mode icon is displayed and the OUTPUT MENU key is highlighted in the OUTPUT area.
Key Operator can change the initial output mode. See p. 14-11.
2.
Select the desired output mode.

To set output to the Primary (main) tray (except Staple): proceed to the next step. To set Staple mode: proceed to step 4. To set output to the Secondary (sub) tray: proceed to step 5.
3-52

3. Touch OUTPUT MENU to display the Output Mode popup menu, then touch MAIN TRAY to highlight it.
To select Non-sort mode, deselect all the keys in the OUTPUT<MAIN TRAY> area. To select Sort mode, touch SORT to highlight it. To select Group mode, touch GROUP to highlight it. To select Face up mode, touch FACE UP in the SURFACE area to highlight it. The Face up mode is compatible with Non-sort, Sort and Group modes.
Using Face up mode and Non-sort or Sort mode in combination, the sorted copies will be output in the reverse order of the originals.
Touch OK on the Output Mode popup menu to return to the Basic Screen. OUTPUT MENU will be highlighted, and the output icon of the selected output mode will be displayed in the OUTPUT area. Proceed to step 6.
See p. 3-50 for details of the output icons displayed on the Basic Screen.
4.
To set Staple-sort mode:

(1) Touch STAPLE on the Basic Screen to highlight it.
The staple position icon will be displayed in the output icon area. To change the staple position, proceed to the next step. Proceed to step (3), if the present setting is desired.
3-53

(2) Touch OUTPUT MENU on the Basic Screen to display the Output Mode popup menu, touch the desired staple position key, then touch OK.
The Basic Screen will be restored, with the selected staple position icon displayed.
When making double-sided copies, select the desired binding mode on the Output Mode popup menu. See p. 3-59 for details of the binding mode.
Staple position
Binding mode
3-54

(3) Check the original set direction with the Original direction icon at the upper left corner of the Basic Screen. To change the original set direction, touch SPECIAL ORIGINAL on the Basic Screen to display the Special Original popup menu, touch the desired original set direction key, then touch OK to return to the Basic Screen.
Proceed to step 6.
5.
Touch OUTPUT MENU to display the Output Mode popup menu, then touch SUB TRAY to highlight it.
To select Face down non-sort mode, deselect both FACE UP and GROUP. To select Face up non-sort mode, touch FACE UP to highlight it. To select Face down group mode, touch GROUP to highlight it. To select Face up group mode, touch FACE UP and GROUP to highlight them. Touch OK to restore the Basic Screen. OUTPUT MENU will be highlighted, and the output icon of the selected output mode will be displayed in the OUTPUT area.
See p. 3-50 for details of the output icons displayed on the Basic Screen.
6.
3-55

See p. 12-5 to be sure that the finisher capacity is not exceeded.
8.
9.
Press [START].
Finisher primary (main) tray of Finisher FS-513/FS-606 gradually goes down while printed materials output. DO NOT allow any object to interfere with the operation of the tray on the left side of the finisher, as any interference may cause damage to the finisher.
When the finisher exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur.
3-56
Output Icons on the Basic Screen

Primary (Main) tray: Face down Non-sort Sort (offset) Group (offset)
Primary (Main) tray: Face up Non-sort Sort (offset) Group (offset)
Primary (Main) tray: Staple-Sort Left 1 posi. Right 1 posi. Left 2 posi. Up 2 posi.
3-57
Secondary (Sub) tray: Face down Non-sort Group
Secondary (Sub) tray: Face up Non-sort Group
3-58
Selecting Binding Mode

When copying in 1)2 or 2)2 mode, specify the binding mode on the Output Mode popup menu to obtain the desired copy result. Right & Left bind: Normal duplex copies Top bind: Duplex copies arranged upside down on the reverse side
The same binding mode is initially selected as the original binding mode specified on the Special Original popup menu.
Binding mode
Copies
3 2
3 2
1 2 2
1.
Touch OUTPUT MENU to display the Output Mode popup menu.
2. 3.
Touch to highlight the desired binding mode key. Touch OK to return to the Basic Screen. 3-59
3-60
Helpful Functions
How to Use Helpful Functions
Making Sample Copy (Proof Copy) .....................................................4-2 Checking Feature Selections / Proof Copying (Check Mode) .............4-4 Interrupt Copying .................................................................................4-8 Storing Job Conditions (Job Memory: Job Store) .............................4-11 Recalling Stored Job Settings (Job Memory: Job Recall) .................4-14 Recalling Previous Job Settings ........................................................4-15 Displaying Screen for Operation Guide (Help Mode).........................4-16
Making Sample Copy (Proof Copy)

Use Proof copy to produce a sample of the copied set before making multiple copies. This is a convenient and cost effective way of viewing the results of the following copying selections. Copying conditions using Store mode Sheet/Cover Insertion Chapter Combination Booklet Image Insert Dual Page Program Job
Specifications for Proof Copy

/ Proof copy is available when using RADF or Platen store mode for multiple originals. / Proof copy is not compatible with Group or Rotation group output mode.
1.
Select the desired copy conditions and enter the desired print quantity.
2.
3.
Press [PROOF COPY] on the control panel.
A sample copy will be output, and the Check Screen will be displayed.
Press [STOP] to suspend the proof copying. In this case, the scanned image data will not be deleted from memory. You cannot change or release selections that appeared dimmed after proof copying.
4-2
If the copy result is satisfactory, proceed to step 5. If any setting changes are required, refer to p. 4-4 under the next heading.
4. 5.
Repeat proof copying until the copy result becomes satisfactory. Change the print quantity, as required.
Proof copy can be performed as needed, until the print quantity amount on the Basic Screen reaches zero. If required, change the print quantity on the Basic Screen.
6.
Press [START].
If the print quantity is not changed, the copier will output the rest, minus the sample sets. When the finisher / trimmer unit / paper exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur.
4-3
Checking Feature Selections / Proof Copying (Check Mode)

Use the Check mode to confirm copying selections before starting print operation. In this mode, use Proof copy to produce a sample of the copied set before making multiple copies. This is a convenient and cost effective way of viewing the results of the following copying selections. Copying conditions using Store mode Sheet/Cover Insertion Chapter Combination Booklet Image Insert Dual Page Program Job
Specifications for Check Mode and Proof Copy

/ Proof copy is available when using RADF, or Platen store mode for multiple originals. / Proof copy is unavailable with Group output mode.
1.
Select the desired copy conditions and enter the desired print quantity.
2.
3.
Press [CHECK] on the control panel.
The Check Screen will be displayed.
4-4
Tray Setting Check Screen
Exclusive Paper Title Check Screen
Touch the lower arrow key to scroll to the next screen in order as shown above. Touching the upper arrow key will resume the previous screen. Touch TrayConfirm to display the Tray Setting Check Screen. And also touch Exclusive paper title to display the Exclusive Paper Title Check Screen. Verify all the settings made for the current job. If settings are OK, proceed to step 8. If a sample copy is needed, proceed to step 6. If making any setting change from the Check Screen, proceed to the next step. If releasing any setting from the Check Screen, proceed to step 5.
4-5

4. To change the settings:
Touch the desired copying condition key on the Check Screen to highlight it. Any key that cannot be highlighted indicates that the copying condition cannot be changed from the Check Screen. Touch CHANGE SETTING. The LCD will display an appropriate screen to change the copying condition selected.
Selecting a basic copying condition key will display the Basic Screen. Selecting a Special Original Mode key will display the Special Original popup menu. Selecting an Image Adjust Mode key will display the Change Image Adjustment Setting Screen. When BOOK MARK has been checked on a subsequent screen, selecting the mode key will jump to that screen. Selecting an Application Mode key will display the Change Application Selection Screen. When BOOK MARK has been checked on a subsequent screen, selecting the application function key will jump to that screen. See p. 10-2 for details. CHANGE SETTING will not function for the following application functions, however they can be released by touching RELEASE SETTING: Program Job, Non-Image Area Erase, Reverse Image, AUTO Layout, Overlay.
Change the setting as desired, then restore the Check Screen to return to the checking steps. From the Basic Screen, press [CHECK] to return to the Check Screen. From the Special Original popup menu, Change Image Adjustment Setting Screen or Change Application Selection Screen, touch OK to return to the Check Screen. When making a set or sample copy, proceed to step 6. To start printing without proofcopying, proceed to step 8.
5.
To release the settings:

Touch the desired copying condition key on the Check Screen to highlight it, then touch RELEASE SETTING. The confirmation screen will appear on the Check Screen.
Touch YES to cancel the function, or NO to restore. If making a sample copy, proceed to the next step. To start printing, proceed to step 8.
4-6

6. Press [PROOF COPY] on the control panel or touch PROOF COPY on the Check Screen.
A sample copy will be output.
Press [STOP] to suspend the proof copying. In this case, the scanned image data will not be deleted from memory. You cannot change or release selections that appeared dimmed after proof copying.
When the copy result is satisfactory, proceed to the next step. When any setting change is required, return to step 4, then repeat proof copying, as required. If the desired selection cannot be changed, press [STOP] to delete all the data in memory, then press [AUTO RESET] to restart the job setting.
7.
Change the print quantity, as required.

Proof copy can be performed as needed, until the print quantity amount on the Basic Screen reaches zero. (Note that the print quantity amount on the Check Screen does not change.) If required, change the print quantity on the Basic Screen.
8.
Press [START].
If the print quantity is not changed, the copier will output the rest, minus the sample sets. When the finisher / trimmer unit / paper exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur.
4-7
Interrupt Copying
Interrupt Copying
Use the Interrupt mode to interrupt copying in progress to perform a simple job. When interrupt copying is completed, the settings for the initial job restore automatically and the Basic Screen displays. Interrupt copying is available when the copier is performing the following operations: Continuously printing the image stored in memory Scanning the originals into memory Scanning the originals into memory in Reserve mode while printing
If desired, Key Operator can change the timing to stop current machine operation for interrupt copying. Note that the compatible copying conditions vary according to the timing selected. See p. 14-38.
Specification for Interrupt Mode

/ The Interrupt mode cannot be selected with the following copier conditions: The Basic Screen is not displayed. Overlay Memory is in use. The Call for Service message displays or a paper misfeed occurs. / Incompatible: 2)1, 2)2, Applications, Mixed Original, Z-Folded Original
1.
Press [INTERRUPT] on the control panel.
The [INTERRUPT] LED turns on and all JOB indicators on the Basic Screen change to INTERRUPT.
4-8
Interrupt Copying
The timing to enter the Interrupt mode varies according to the job in progress on the machine when [INTERRUPT] is pressed. See the following page.
In Reserve mode, pressing [INTERRUPT] before the copier finishes scanning the reserve job originals clears the settings selected for the reserve job. For details of Reserve mode, see p. 3-40.
2.
Set copy conditions, as desired.

The initial settings in Interrupt mode are as follows. Colour Mode Copy Mode RADF AE Lens Mode APS Print Quantity Finisher :Full Colour : 1)1 : ON : ON : 1.000 (100%) : ON :1 : Sub Tray
Remove any document from the platen glass or from the document feeder, if present.
3.
4.
Press [START] to start the interrupt copying.

When [CHECK] is pressed during Interrupt copying, the information displayed reflects the initial copy job settings. Check mode will not display Interrupt copy job information.
4-9
Interrupt Copying
5. When Interrupt copying is completed, press [INTERRUPT] again.
The [INTERRUPT] LED turns out and the INTERRUPT indicator on the Basic Screen returns to the JOB indicators. The settings of the initial job will be restored on the Basic Screen.
6.
Press [START] to resume copying.

For particular jobs in progress, copying will cease only after certain phases of the immediate operation are completed, as indicated by the [INTERRUPT] LED conditions described below. Collectively printing image stored in memory The LED blinks until one set of the current job is printed. Then the LED remains steady for the temporary job performed in Interrupt mode. Scanning originals into memory The LED blinks until scanning is completed for all originals placed in the document feeder. Then, the LED remains steady for the temporary job performed in Interrupt mode. Scanning originals into memory while printing in Reserve mode The LED blinks until the copier completes the current printing job, scans all originals placed on the document feeder, and prints one set of the Reserved job. The LED remains steady for the temporary job performed in Interrupt mode.
4-10
Storing Job Conditions (Job Memory: Job Store)

Use Job Store to store up to 30 frequently used copy job settings, which can be recalled at any time. The stored jobs can be given alphabetical names.
Specifications for Job Memory

/ All copying functions can be selected. / Interrupt mode cannot be used while in Job Memory.
1.
Make job selections from the Basic Screen and/or Application Selection Screen.
2.
Press [JOB MEMORY] on the control panel.
The Job No. Selection Screen will be displayed.
3.
Touch STORE.
The Job Store Check Screen will be displayed.
4-11

4. Review the settings on the Job Store Check Screen.
Touch the lower arrow key to scroll to the following pages. Check that the selections made in step 1 are correctly entered.
If any correction is required, touch CANCEL to return to the Basic Screen. Make new selections, then restart the Job Store operation from step 2.
5.
Touch OK.
The Job No. Selection Screen will be restored.
To suspend the storing job after step 6, press [AUTO RESET]. Job Memory mode will be cancelled, and the Basic Screen will return from any screen.
6.
Touch to highlight one of the keys numbered from 1~30 to store the job under that number.
The screen displays 15 job number keys. The arrow key at the lower left corner can be used to scroll to the next/previous page. A blank key indicates that no job is stored under that key, and a named job without a lock icon ( ) displayed can be overwritten. The key with a lock icon ( ) displayed is locked and cannot be selected.
4-12
To lock or unlock a job, and to delete a locked job, see p. 14-21.
If you wish to cancel the job number selection, touch CANCEL to restore the Basic Screen, which displays the settings made in step 1. If you wish to cancel the settings, press [AUTO RESET].
7.
Touch OK.
The Job Name Registration Screen will be displayed.
8.
Enter a job name.

Enter a job name in up to 16 characters, using the touch screen alphabet keypad. To correct an entry, touch 1-CHARACTER DELETE repeatedly to delete each character entered, then enter the correct job name.
If you do not wish to enter a name, simply touch OK. The key displays 16 asterisks (*) in place of a name. When changing the name of a job previously stored, touch 1-CHARACTER DELETE repeatedly to delete the previous name, then enter the new name.
9.
Touch OK.
The Job No. Selection Screen will be restored. Check that the job name has been correctly entered.
10. Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Basic Screen.
4-13
Recalling Stored Job Settings (Job Memory: Job Recall)
Recalling Stored Job Settings (Job Memory: Job Recall)

Use Job Recall to recall jobs that are already stored in Job Memory.
1. 2.

Touch to highlight a job number key to select a job you want to recall.
The screen displays 15 job number keys. If required, scroll to the next page with the arrow key to reach the desired job number key (16~30).
3.
If desired, touch JOB CHECK.

The Job Recall Check Screen displays to enable you to review the settings.
4.
Touch OK.
The settings of the selected job will be recalled on the restored Basic Screen. To cancel the recall mode, touch CANCEL to return to the Basic Screen.
5.
Position original(s), then press [START] to print.
4-14
Recalling Previous Job Settings
Recalling Previous Job Settings

Follow the procedure below to copy with a previous jobs settings.
Only the last-completed output job settings can be recalled as the previous job settings. Non-complete job or reserve job settings cannot be recalled, even if the setting operations have been made last. The previous job settings can be recalled, even after the machine power is turned off then on.
1. 2.

Touch PRE-JOB RECALL.
The JOB CHECK key will be displayed between STORE and PRE-JOB RECALL on the screen
3. 4. 5. 6.
Touch JOB CHECK to display the Job Check Screen.

Check the settings of the previous output job.

The settings of the previous output job is recalled on the screen.
Change the settings recalled on the screen, if desired. When all settings are acceptable, position original(s) in the document feeder or on the platen glass, then press [START].
4-15
Displaying Screen for Operation Guide (Help Mode)

The Help Screen provides you with the information about the current screen mode and about setting procedures. Help mode can be accessed from any screen except Job Memory and Key Operator Screens. Help mode provides two types of Help Screens according to the current screen mode: 1 2 Help Screen accessed from Basic Screen Help Screen accessed from screens other than Basic Screen
To Display Help Screen from Basic Screen

1. Return to the Basic Screen, then press [HELP].
The Help Screen will be displayed.
4-16

2. Touch the desired key to display specific information.
STAPLE SUPPLY provides information on replacing staple cartridge. PUNCH provides information on emptying waste basket. TRIMMER provides information on emptying waste basket. RADF provides information on positioning originals in the document feeder. TONER SUPPLY provides information on adding toner. PAPER SUPPLY provides information on loading paper in each tray. HELP MENU displays the Help Menu Screen which provides a list of all of the copier functions. When a function item is touched, the Help Screen displays information specific to that topic. PANEL CONTRAST displays the screen to adjust the contrast of the LCD panel. Toner Recovery box provides information on exchanging the toner recovery box. FOR ASSISTANCE displays the extension number of the Key Operator. TELEPHONE/FAX displays the phone/fax number of your service centre.
Touch Touch on the Help Screen, if provided, to scroll to the next page. to return to the previous page.
Touch KEY OPERATOR MODE to enter the Key Operator mode. See p. 14-2.
4-17

3. Touch EXIT to return to the Basic Screen.
Help Menu Screen
Select one of the 8 help menu items on the Help Menu Screen to display subsequent Help Screens. Touch on the Help Screen, if provided, to scroll to the next page. Touch to return to the previous page. Touch MENU on the subsequent Help Screen to return to the Help Menu Screen, then touch EXIT to restore the Basic Screen. 1. Hard keys displays the information on control panel buttons. 2. RADF/Platen displays the information on unsuitable RADF originals and maintenance of the document feeder and platen glass. 3. Basic modes displays the information on basic functions provided on the Basic Screen. 4. Applications displays operational information on 16 application functions provided on the Application Selection Screen. 5. Special orig. displays the information on functions provided on the Special Original popup menu. 6. Output modes displays the information on Finisher functions. 7. Job memory displays the information on Job Memory. 8. Image Adjust displays the information on Colour Image Adjustment.
4-18

To Display Help Screen from Other Screens
1. While in any screen other than the Basic Screen, press [HELP].
The Help Screen displays to provide the information about the current screen mode and setting procedures.
2.
Touch EXIT.
The screen that was displayed before pressing [HELP] will be restored.
4-19
4-20
Troubleshooting
How to Handle Machine Troubles
When Call for Service Message Is Displayed ...................................5-2 Clearing Mishandled Paper..................................................................5-5 When JAM Appears on Folder Key (Or Arrow Key Flashes) .............5-7 When ADD PAPER Appears on Folder Key (Or Arrow Key Flashes) 5-9 When Memory Full Message Is Displayed (Memory Overflow) ......5-11 When Power OFF/ON Screen Is Displayed .......................................5-14 Troubleshooting Tips..........................................................................5-15
When Call for Service Message Is Displayed

A Call for Service message indicates a machine condition that requires the attention of your service representative. The Call for Service Screen usually displays the telephone and facsimile numbers of your service representative.
When the Call for Service Screen is displayed, be sure to contact your service representative immediately by following the procedure below.
1.
Make note of the Report code No. indicated in the second line of the message area.
If your machine uses the Remote Diagnostics option and is automatically monitored by your service representative, the Key Operator can call for service using the Key Operator setting. See p. 14-46.
After calling for service using the Key Operator setting, be sure to turn OFF the power switch immediately, then unplug the machine as described here.
5-2

2. Turn OFF the power switch.
3. 4.
Unplug the machine. Contact your service representative and report the condition and code No.
5-3

Limited Use of the Copier in Trouble
If the message shown below is displayed on the Call for Service Screen, you may continue operating the copier on a limited function basis and utilize the trays and ADU that are not affected by the trouble. To obtain this limited functionality of the copier, consult your service representative. Be sure to utilize the limited function only temporarily, and arrange for machine repair immediately.
1.
If the limited use of the copier is available, the following message is displayed in the message area instead of the Report code.
ex.
Tray 2 failure Press AUTO to select except this tray
2.
Press [AUTO RESET].

Please switch ON/OFF E 18-2
Make note of the Report code No.
3.
Turn OFF then ON the power switch.

A copying job can continue without using the troubled portion of the machine (ex. Tray 2). EVEN IF THE COPYING JOB CAN BE CONTINUED WITH THE ABOVE OPERATION, BE SURE TO CONTACT YOUR SERVICE REPRESENTATIVE IMMEDIATELY WHEN THE CALL FOR SERVICE SCREEN IS DISPLAYED.
5-4
Clearing Mishandled Paper

When a paper misfeed occurs, the copier stops making copies and mishandled paper codes display on the screen to indicate misfeed area(s). Copying operation cannot be continued until all the misfeed locations are cleared.
Graphic Illustration key Touch to display the subsequent screens for the disposal action.
Paper jam position display Numbers flashing or lighting indicate the jammed positions.
Message area An action will be displayed.
The above screen displays all the jam numbers for the sake of explanation. Actually a few numbers appear when a paper misfeed occurs.
1.
Touch Graphic Illustration on the screen.

The screen illustrating the method for the disposal action will be displayed.
Before performing the clearing procedure, see p. 1-4 for the caution label locations inside the machine.
2.
Follow the procedure on the screen to remove misfed paper.

Touch on the screen, if provided, to go to the next page of a series of illustrations.
When removing mishandled paper, be sure to leave no torn paper inside the machine.
3.
When completed, the Basic Screen will be restored.

If any misfeed location is left, the screen displays the next disposal procedure in the message area and the location number in the jam position display. Repeat steps 1 to 2 until all the locations are cleared.
5-5
The drum unit generates high voltage. To avoid bodily electrical shock, NEVER TOUCH the area.
The internal fixing unit is very hot. To avoid getting burned, DO NOT TOUCH.
Be careful of removing staples stuck inside the machine so as not to get injured.
DO NOT INSERT your finger into the two RADF hinge portions, otherwise you may be injured.
5-6
When JAM Appears on Folder Key (Or Arrow Key Flashes)

If a misfeed occurs with the print/scan job in progress while you are setting a reserve job, SCAN or PRINT JOB folder key on the Basic Screen will change to flashing JAM JOB. When more than four jobs have been specified and the folder key of the print/scan job in trouble is not currently displayed on the screen, the arrow key to scroll to that job will flash. Follow the procedure below to remove mishandled paper.
1.
Display the Jam Position Screen.

Touch JAM JOB. The Jam Position Screen will be displayed.
When the arrow key flashes, touch the key to scroll to the JAM JOB folder key, then touch it to display the Jam Position Screen.
If ADD PAPER is displayed instead of JAM JOB, see p. 5-9.
5-7

2. Touch Graphic Illustration.
The screen illustrating the method for the disposal action will be displayed.
See p. 5-5 for details on clearing procedure.
3.
Follow the procedure on the screen to remove misfed paper.

When all procedures are completed, the Basic Screen will be restored.
JAM JOB has changed to STOP, and the settings for the current printing job are displayed on the screen.
4. 5.
Press [START].
The scan/print job will resume.
Touch FREE JOB to continue the reserve job setting.

The drum unit generates high voltage. To avoid electrical shock, NEVER TOUCH the area.
The internal fixing unit is very hot. To avoid getting burned, DO NOT TOUCH.
Be careful of removing staples stuck inside the machine so as not to get injured.
DO NOT INSERT your finger into the two RADF hinge portions, otherwise you may be injured.
5-8
When ADD PAPER Appears on Folder Key (Or Arrow Key
When ADD PAPER Appears on Folder Key (Or Arrow Key Flashes)
If the paper supply for a print job in progress becomes depleted while you are setting a reserve job, PRINT JOB on the Basic Screen will change to flashing ADD PAPER. When more than four jobs have been specified and the folder key of the print job in trouble is not currently displayed on the screen, the arrow key to scroll to that job will flash.
Follow the procedure below to continue the copying operation.
1.
Display the Basic Screen for the print job in progress.

Touch ADD PAPER. The Basic Screen for the print job will be displayed. When the arrow key flashes, touch the key to scroll to the ADD PAPER folder key, then touch it to display the Basic Screen for the print job.
2.
Check the flashing tray key, then supply that empty tray with copy paper.
When paper supply is completed, ADD PAPER changes to STOP.
See p. 2-23 for details on loading paper.
5-9
When ADD PAPER Appears on Folder Key (Or Arrow Key

3. 4. Press [START].
The print job will resume.
Touch FREE JOB to continue the reserve job setting.
5-10
When Memory Full Message Is Displayed (Memory
When Memory Full Message Is Displayed (Memory Overflow)

In certain modes, this printer/copier uses memory to make operations convenient and smooth flowing. Occasional memory overflow may occur if the installed memory is inadequate for the copy conditions selected. To handle the Memory overflow condition while performing a job, take the appropriate action described below. These actions enable you to continue the job or suspend the job.
Should memory overflow occur frequently, it is recommended that you contact your service representative to expand the memory capacity in your machine.
5-11

Memory Overflow in Current Job
When memory overflow occurs while scanning the first job, the machine stops immediately, and the screen provides JOB STOP and SCAN STOP as the only two available options.
If the job settings include Booklet mode, SCAN STOP will disappear.
To delete all the scanned data and discontinue the job, touch JOB STOP. To give up further scanning but print out all the data already scanned into memory, touch SCAN STOP.
5-12

Memory Overflow in Reserve Job
When memory overflow occurs during the reserve operation, CONTINUE also appears on the active screen. In this case, the machine will not stop until all the jobs on standby for printing are completed.
If the job settings include Booklet mode, SCAN STOP will disappear.
To delete the scanned data and discontinue the last reserve job, touch JOB STOP. To give up further scanning but print out the data already scanned for the last reserve job, touch SCAN STOP. To continue scanning the last reserve job, touch CONTINUE as the current printing job gradually enables memory for new data.
5-13
When Power OFF/ON Screen Is Displayed
When Power OFF/ON Screen Is Displayed

When any trouble affects the electrical signal of the copier, the Power OFF/ON Screen will be displayed.
Follow the procedure below to turn the machine power off then on.
1.
Turn OFF the power switch.
2. 3.
Wait about 10 seconds. Turn ON the power switch.
5-14
Troubleshooting Tips
COPIER DOES NOT OPERATE WHEN POWER SWITCH IS ON Fully insert paper trays. Close RADF. Close Front doors of main body. Close Finisher door. Check to be sure main power switch is ON. Check to be sure power plug is firmly inserted in electrical socket. COPY IMAGE IS TOO LIGHT Manually adjust copy density to darker density. Check toner indicator and add toner, if required. Check paper for dampness. Do not leave paper in copier when humidity is high. Check to see if Photo, Text, or Map mode is required. Check the Density shift. COPY IMAGE IS TOO DARK Manually adjust copy density to lighter density. Check to see if Photo, Text, or Map mode is required. Check the Density shift. COPY IMAGE IS NOT CLEAN OR SHOWS SPOTS Use clean originals since dirt marks may be copied. Keep platen glass and inner surface of document cover clean. Call for service if Call for service is displayed in the message area. Check density indicator and lighten if required. COPY PAPER MISHANDLES DURING COPYING Fan copy paper and load it with curl side in proper location. Do not exceed the tray capacity. COPY IMAGE CAN BE RUBBED OFF Check copy paper thickness. Use Thick paper mode, if paper weight requires it. MAGNIFICATION CANNOT BE CHANGED Reduce & Shift is incompatible with magnification. Press [AUTO RESET] and set desired copying conditions without using Reduce & Shift. DUPLEX MODES CANNOT BE SELECTED Fully close RADF, then select Duplex mode again. COPYING DOES NOT BEGIN AFTER PRESSING [START] Insert or adjust the appropriate paper tray for paper size selected. Close document cover firmly. Close Front doors and Toner access door of main body completely. Close Finisher door completely. Check to see if the message Please close stacker cover of Trimmer is displayed. Close Trimmer stacker cover or front door completely. COPYING DOES NOT RESUME AFTER MISHANDLED PAPER IS REMOVED Check copier diagram on touch screen for additional indications of mishandled paper.
5-15
COPY QUALITY IS POOR Check paper for dampness, and replace it if necessary. THE ORIGINAL PAPER IS MISHANDLED OR SKEWED IN THE DOCUMENT FEEDER Originals should conform to the recommended size and weight. Be sure originals are not stapled. Align originals evenly in the RADF. Check to make sure paper guides meet the width of mixed size originals. COPY IMAGE IS SKEWED WHEN BYPASS IS USED Be sure copy paper is inserted straight. USING EKC, COPIES CANNOT BE MADE AFTER PASSWORD IS ENTERED Check to see if the message EXCEEDS LIMIT is displayed. Contact Key Operator to reset limit. FINISHER DOES NOT OPERATE Touch OUTPUT MENU. Check for a paper misfeed and remove it, as required. Properly close finisher door. RADF INDICATOR WILL NOT LIGHT AFTER [AUTO RESET] IS PRESSED Fully close RADF. RADF LIGHT IS FLASHING The document feeder is ready to accept originals. Insert originals on RADF tray, press [AUTO RESET], then [START]. ADD TONER MESSAGE IS DISPLAYED New toner supply is needed. Follow instructions for adding toner. CALL FOR PM IS DISPLAYED IN MESSAGE AREA Contact your service representative for Preventive Maintenance. APS SELECTS THE WRONG PAPER SIZE Paper guides must be adjusted exactly to the size of originals. IN MIXED ORIGINAL MODE, A MESSAGE TO LOAD A REQUIRED PAPER SIZE DISPLAYS, EVEN THOUGH THAT SIZE IS LOADED IN ONE OF THE TRAYS Paper sizes loaded in the trays must be consistent with the tray position size; otherwise, the tray key on the Basic Screen will blink. THE BASIC SCREEN DOES NOT DISPLAY SETTINGS AS DESCRIBED IN INSTRUCTION MANUAL Check with the Key Operator, as Initial Settings may have been changed. PLEASE CHECK ORIGINAL This message displays when the copier detects a non-standard paper size on the platen glass. Select paper size and press [START]. 1.000 magnification will be selected automatically. If this message continues to display after selecting paper size, select 1.000 magnification, even if it is already indicated, then press [START]. If desired, ask your service representative to enable the machine to default to 1.000 magnification in this situation.
5-16
SHEET INSERTION RESULT IS NOT AS EXPECTED Blank insertion: Be sure manuscript originals do not already include blank sheets in the locations designated for sheet insertion. Copy insertion: To ensure that chapter sheets in 1-2 mode always appear on the right hand side in the finished set, insertion sheets must be designated on the page setting screen with odd numbers, not even. If required, make an even numbered original page odd by inserting a blank sheet in front of that page, so that the blank sheet is even and the insertion sheet is odd. FINISHER STAPLE RESULT IS NOT AS EXPECTED The 2 staple position functions only on copy paper that is loaded vertically (portrait style). COPIES SKEW IN THE STAPLED SETS Check to see if copy paper is excessively curled in the tray. Reload the copy paper upside down. USING PUNCH, COPIES CANNOT BE PUNCHED Check to see if the message Waste basket of Punching kit is full is displayed. Empty the waste basket. COPIES CANNOT BE STAPLED OR PUNCHED IN POSITION Check to make sure the side guide plates are securely aligned to the copy paper in the paper tray to be used. PAPER MISFEED OCCURS FREQUENTLY INSIDE FINISHER Check to see if copy paper is excessively curled in the tray. Reload the copy paper upside down. USING TRIMMER, COPIES CANNOT BE TRIMMED Check to see if the message Waste basket of Trimmer is full is displayed. Empty the waste basket.
5-17
5-18
Specifications
Main Body & Option Specifications
Main Body Specifications ....................................................................6-2 Option Specifications...........................................................................6-4
Main Body Specifications

Main Body
Name: Type: Transfer method: Platen glass: Light-sensitive unit: Light source: Developing method: Fixing method: Density adjustment: Magnification ratio: Enlargement: Reduction: bizhub PRO C500 Console type Indirect electrostatic method Fixed OPC Xenon lamp Dry, 2-component magnetic brush developing Heat roller Automatic and manual (9 steps) 1:1 1.0 % 1:1.154 (115.4 %), 1:1.224 (122.4 %), 1:1.414 (141.4 %), 1:2.000 (200 %) 1:0.866 (86.6 %), 1:0.816 (81.6 %), 1:0.707 (70.7 %), 1:0.500 (50 %) Zoom/Special ratio magnification ratio: 25 % to 400 % in 1 % increments Plain paper: 64 to 256 g/m2 Tab, 3-hole
* Set offset master, intermediate paper, or labels one sheet each on Multi-sheet bypass tray. * OHP films and ink-jet paper are unavailable.
Copy paper: Special paper:
51 copies/min. (A4), 38 copies/min. (A4R), 28 copies/ min. (A3), 50 copies/min. (B5), 31 copies/min. (B4), 43 copies/min. (B5R) Copy speed may vary depending on paper type or weight. Continuous copying: 1 to 9,999 copies Types of original: Sheet, book originals Original size: A3 (11" x 17" or 303 mm x 438 mm) maximum Copy size: Standard size: A3 to A6R size (image cutoff width: leading and trailing ends 2 mm 2 mm, top and bottom 1.5 mm 1.5 mm) Wide size and non-standard size: Max. 330 mm x 487 mm * Full-Image Area function is not provided on this machine. Paper supply method: Tray 1, 2, 3 (universal); 500 sheets (90 g/m2) Tray 4 (LCT) (universal); 2,500 sheets (90 g/m2) (LT-211 option) Multi-sheet bypass tray; 250 sheets (90 g/m2) These specifications are subject to change without notice
Copying speed:
6-2

Warm-up time: First copy time: Approx. 7 minutes (20C 50 %RH, 230 V) Approx. 6.0 seconds (A4) in Black mode Approx. 7.6 seconds (A4) in Full colour/Single colour mode AC 230 V / 50 Hz (This equipment selects the correct voltage automatically.) 3.4 KW max. (with option) 78 dB max. (with option) Approx. 313 kg (main body) + 1.6 kg w/Platen cover (CV-131) + 14.5 kg w/RADF + 56 kg w/Finisher (FS-513) + 66 kg w/Finisher (FS-606) + 10.5 kg w/Cover sheet feeder (PI-110) + 3 kg w/Punching kit (PK-507/PK-508) + 40 kg w/LCT (LT-211) + 68 kg w/Trimmer unit (TU-109) 794 (W) x 889 (D) x 1181 (H) mm (main body + RADF) 2139 (W) x 889 (D) x 1181 (H) mm (main body + RADF + FS-606 + LT-211) 3162 (W) x 889 (D) x 1181 (H) mm (main body + RADF + FS-606 + TU-109 + LT-211) 1084 (W) x 972 (D) mm (main body + RADF) 2224 (W) x 972 (D) mm (main body + RADF + FS-606 + LT-211)
* Effective size is dimensions required when the Multi-sheet bypass tray is opened.
Power: Power consumption: Sound power level: Weight:
Size:
Effective size*:
These specifications are subject to change without notice
6-3
Option Specifications
RADF (DF-319)
Function: Type of original: Feeds 1- and 2-sided originals automatically 35 g/m2 ~ 200 g/m2 in Simplex mode (Use Thin mode of THICKNESS/SPECIAL ORIGINAL for 35 g/m2 ~ 49 g/m2 paper) 50 g/m2 ~ 200 g/m2 in Duplex mode (Use Thick mode of THICKNESS/SPECIAL ORIGINAL for 129 g/m2 ~ 200 g/m2 paper) Max. 297 mm x 431.8 mm (11.7"x17") Min. 128 mm x 139.7 mm (5.0"x5.5") A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, A5R, 11"x17", 8.5"x13", 8.5"x11" 100 sheets max. (80 g/m2) Automatic feed at a time 588 (W) x 519 (D) x 135 (H) mm Approx. 14.5 kg Supply from main body
Original size:
Original capacity: Original insertion: Dimensions: Weight: Power source:
FS-513/FS-606 In-Bin Stapler Finisher

Offset catch tray Sorting by shifting (30 2 mm) (copies are delivered face down) Paper sizes: A3, B4, F4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, A5R, B6, A6R, 13"x19", 12"x18", 11"x17", 8.5"x14", 8.5"x11", 8.5"x11"R, 5.5"x8.5" A4R/8.5"x11"R only in Three-Fold mode. Secondary (sub) tray is also available for exiting Non STD size paper. Paper type: 50 g/m2 ~ 256 g/m2 paper 60 g/m2 ~ 105 g/m2 in Three-Fold mode Special (Label, Tab, 4-holes) Number of stapled sheet: 50 sheets max. or 5 mm or less (80 g/m2 paper) Staple cartridge: 5,000 staples Dimensions: 656 (W) x 656 (D) x 990 (H) mm Weight: Approx. 55 kg (FS-513) / 65 kg (FS-606) Power source: Supply from main body These specifications are subject to change without notice Type: Sorting system:
6-4
PI-110 Cover Sheet Feeder
Function: Configuration: Types of paper: Paper sizes: Paper feed into Finisher FS-513/FS-606 2 trays (upper/lower) 50 to 256 g/m2 paper Upper tray A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, 8.5"x11", 8.5"x11"R, 5.5"x8.5" Lower tray A3, B4, F4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, 11"x17", 8.5"x14", 8.5"x11", 8.5"x11"R, 5.5"x8.5", and those Wide sizes (max. 314 mm x 445 mm) 200 sheets max. or 30 mm or less (200 g/m2 paper) 511 (W) x 620 (D) x 220 (H) mm Approx. 10.5 kg Supply from finisher
Stack capacity: Dimensions: Weight: Power source:
TU-109 Trimmer Unit

Function: Types of paper: Paper sizes: Number of trimmed sheet: Trimming the end of booklet 64 to 105 g/m2 paper A3, B4, A4R, 11"x17", 8.5"x14", 8.5"x11"R Fold mode 3 sheets max. (105 g/m2 paper or less) Stitch & Fold mode 20 sheets max. using 80 g/m2 paper (19 sheets max. with a thick cover paper) 16 sheets max. using 105 g/m2 paper (15 sheets max. with a thick cover paper) 10 mm max. Approx. 512 sheets max. (80 g/m2 paper) 100 sets max of 2~5-sheet-folded booklet (500 sheets max.) 50 sets max. of 6~10-sheet-folded booklet (500 sheets max.) 32 sets max. of 11~16-sheet-folded booklet (512 sheets max.) 1280 (W) x 610 (D) x 562 (H) mm Approx. 68 kg Supply from outlet
Trimming width: Stack capacity:
Dimensions: Weight: Power source:
These specifications are subject to change without notice
6-5
PK-507/PK-508 Punching Kit
Function: Number of punch holes: Hole diameter: Hole pitch: Paper sizes: Types of paper: Dimensions: Weight: Power source: Punching file holes in copies 4 6.5 mm 0.5 mm 80 mm 0.5 mm A3, B4, A4, B5, 11"x17", 8.5"x11" 50 g/m2 ~ 128 g/m2 paper 68 (W) x 442 (D) x 120 (H) mm Approx. 2 kg Supply from finisher
LT-211 Large Capacity Tray

Function: Paper sizes: Types of paper: Capacity: Dimensions: Weight: Power source: Paper feed into main body A3, B4, A4, B5, 13"x19", 12"x18", 11"x17", 8.5"x14", 8.5"x11", and those Wide sizes 64 g/m2 ~ 105 g/m2 paper Thick: 106 g/m2 ~ 256 g/m2 paper 4,000 sheets 720 (W) x 639 (D) x 485 (H) mm Approx. 40 kg Supply from main body
Memory Unit
MU-412: 256 MB (available one for each colour)
Others
Platen Cover (CV-131) Trimmer Relay Kit (TU-109A Kit) Image Processor (IP-901) Hard Disk Drive (HD-106) Key Counter These specifications are subject to change without notice
6-6
Advanced
Colour Image Adjustment
About Colours ......................................................................................7-4 Colour Copy Quality.............................................................................7-7 Selecting Density Level and Whitening the Background ...................7-19 Changing Colours Using RGB and HSB Values (Colour Adjustment)7-24 Changing Colours Using CMYK Value (Colour Balance Adjustment) 7-29 Selecting Line Screen, Dot Screen, or High Compression (Screen Setting)...............................................................................................7-31 Adjusting Sharpness and Contrast / Selecting Gloss Mode .............7-34 Making Fine Adjustment in Image Detection (Image Judge) .............7-37 Specifying Original Type (Original Image/Type in Special Original)....7-39
About Colours
About Colours
RGB and CMYK Models
Have you ever wondered why the world surrounding us appears coloured to our eyes? Light is electromagnetic waves with wavelengths between about 380 - 780 nm, also called visible rays. The wavelengths of visible rays can be separated into the rainbow colours violet, indigo, blue, green, yellow, orange, and red, from the shortest wavelength in order. When all the wavelengths of the visible rays strike your eye at the same time, white colour is perceived. We see the objects in colour because they reflect or transmit visible light of different wavelengths or frequencies.
(m) (nm) Slit Prisma
White light
Light
Colour Reflection
Visible rays
Electromagnetic wave
The colours separated from visible light are called primary colours. Primary colours cannot be produced from other colours. These colours, however, can be combined to make up any other colour (colour mixture). The colour mixture provides two different types, three primary colours of light and three primary colours of pigment. The three primary colours of light are called additive colour mixture, and the more colours are added, the brighter it will be. Mixing red (R), green (G), and blue (B) coloured lights, various colours can be created.
7-4
About Colours
The three primary colours of pigment are called subtractive colour mixture, and the more colours are added, the darker it will be. Various colours can be created by mixing cyan (C), magenta (M), and yellow (Y) pigments (such as ink or toner), however, black (K) is actually used as the fourth colour in addition to the three primary pigments.
Three primary colors of light
Three primary colors of pigment
7-5
About Colours
HSB Model
This model is based on the human perception of colour. When our eyes perceive colours in objects, we receive the information not only on the colour itself (reddish, bluish, etc.) but the brightness (rather bright, dark, etc.) and the purity (vivid, dull, etc.) of the colour. The colour perception (reddish, bluish, etc.) is defined as hue (H). The strength or purity of the colour is defined as saturation (S), and the lightness or darkness of the colour is defined as brightness (B). The above three elements are called the three attributes of colour. With these three attributes, the Munsell colour system has been created to describe colours in a three-dimensional space.
Brightness
Saturation
Hue
7-6
Colour Copy Quality
Colour Copy Quality

Modifying Colours
As mentioned above, colours can be reproduced by mixing four pigments, the three primary colours cyan (C), magenta (M), yellow (Y), and black (K). To enhance the copy quality, this machine allows you to modify colours by means of the three attributes of colour based upon the human eye and perception. The following methods are provided: Adjust the density of the whole image.
Original Density
+4
7-7
Colour Copy Quality

Adjust the hue, saturation, and brightness.
Original Hue
+4
Saturation
+4
7-8
Colour Copy Quality

Brightness
+4
The hue adjustment leads the colour of the image to another colour adjacent in the colour circle of red (R), yellow (Y), green (G), cyan (C), blue (B), and magenta (M).
7-9
Colour Copy Quality

Change the hue by varying the images red (R), green (G), and blue (B) individually or mutually.
Original Red
+4
Green
+4
7-10
Colour Copy Quality
Blue
+4
7-11
Colour Copy Quality

Change the hue by varying the images cyan (C), magenta (M), yellow (Y), and black (K) individually or mutually.
Original Cyan
4 Magenta
+4
+4
7-12
Colour Copy Quality
Yellow
4 Black
+4
+4
7-13
Colour Copy Quality

Reproducing Images
This machine provides two methods for reproducing images. The Dither (Error Diffusion) method uses small dots (600 dots per inch) to reproduce the image. This method is appropriate for text originals. The Screen method also provides two methods, Line Screen and Dot Screen. The Line Screen uses many halftone lines, like scanning lines of a television, while Dot Screen uses small dots to reproduce the image. The Screen methods provide fine quality in reproducing the gradation in scanned photographic images, however, text originals may not be reproduced clearly by using the same method as photo originals.
Dot screen Black images Dots Colour images Dots
Line screen Black images Line Colour images Line
7-14
Colour Copy Quality

What Is Image Detection?
In many cases, originals include both photo and text. Although the text is normally printed in black, a colour printer inevitably uses not only the black toner but cyan, magenta, and yellow in layers to reproduce the black text. Using the Screen method, the colour printer may add colours in large or bold characters to reproduce the text in the same way as the photo. While scanning such originals, this machine detects and determines the photo portion and text area, so that the text area should be reproduced in single colour and the photo portion in full colour. This function also allows you to obtain the optimum print results by modifying the standard for image detection according to the character size of the text or its proportion in the whole original.
Solid
Solid
Detected as text
7-15
Colour Copy Quality

Applying Filters
In addition to the colour adjustment and image reproduction methods, this machine allows you to apply the following filters to improve the copy image quality. Sharpen the outline of the image. (Sharpness)
Sharpness
Original 4 +4
Increase the contrast of the image. (Contrast)

Contrast
Original 4 +4
7-16
Colour Copy Quality

Increase shine on the image. (Gloss Mode)
Gloss mode
Original
7-17
Colour Copy Quality

Improving Colour Copy Quality
To improve the colour copy quality, this machine provides the three types of adjustment methods: Colour adjustment, Selecting the image reproduction method and its adjustment, and other adjustments. The colour adjustment is performed by varying the level of pigments in RGB model or CMYK model, or by modifying the hue, saturation, and brightness of the image. To reproduce the copy image, select one of the two methods, Line Screen and Dot Screen. The Image Detection function will help in selecting the most appropriate method for each part of the original to make the copies of scanned image. For further improvement, use Copy Density or apply filters for Sharpness, Contrast, and Gloss Mode.
7-18
Selecting Density Level and Whitening the Background

Automatic Exposure (AE) operates to detect the density level of the original image while scanning, and automatically selects the appropriate density for the copy.
The density to be selected automatically using AE can be adjusted on the machine. See [20] AE Adjustment in the Key Operator mode, p. 14-53.
To Adjust Copy Density / Background Whiteness

Follow the procedure below to select the exposure (density) manually to make darker or lighter copies. Background Whiteness Adjust the background whiteness when copying newspaper or recycled paper originals.
Background Whitness
Original 4 +4
7-19

1. Touch IMAGE ADJUST on the Basic Screen.
The Image Adjustment Screen will be displayed.
2.
Touch COPY DENSITY to display the Copy Density Adjustment Screen.
3.
Touch the desired density level key from -1 to -4 to make the copy image lighter, or from +1 to +4 to make it darker.
Touch STD. to select the middle density level. To resume the AE, touch AUTO to highlight it.
7-20

4. Touch BACKGROUND ADJUST to adjust the background whiteness, if necessary.
Touch the desired level key from -1 to -4 to make the background lighter, or from +1 to +4 to make it darker.
Touch OK. The Copy Density Adjustment Screen will be restored.

To resume the previous setting, touch CANCEL. Use Adjustment Proof Copy to check the adjustment result. See p. 7-22.
5.
Touch OK.
The Basic Screen will be restored, with the IMAGE ADJUST key highlighted.
To resume the previous setting, touch CANCEL. To restore the initial settings, touch RECALL STANDARD.
7-21

Setting Density Shift
Use this function to shift each of nine density levels to three levels lighter or three levels darker. This function can be set to use in combination with each of the four Original Image modes (Text/Photo, Photo, Text, and Map) in each of the three colour modes (Full colour, Black, and Single colour), therefore twelve sorts of settings are available for the density adjustment.
1.
Select the desired colour mode from the Full colour, Black, or Single colour.
2. 3.
Touch SPECIAL ORIGINAL on the Basic Screen to display the Special Original popup menu. Select the desired Original Image mode, then press [P (COUNTER)].
(e.g.) Selected Original Image mode: TEXT/PHOTO, Colour mode: BLACK

Density Shift (Text / Photo Black) 3 (0 - 6)
Selected Original image mode: PHOTO, Colour mode: FULL COLOUR

Density Shift (Photo Full colour) 3 (0 - 6)
7-22

Selected Original image mode: TEXT, Colour mode: SINGLE COLOUR
Density Shift (Text Single colour) 3 (0 - 6)
Selected Original image mode: MAP, Colour mode: FULL COLOUR

Density Shift (Map Full colour) 3 (0 - 6)
For details of the Original Image mode, see p. 7-39.
4.
Press any key (from 0 to 6) using the keypad to determine the Density Shift.
Select smaller number for darker level, or larger number for lighter level. Entering 7 or above will be ignored.
5.
Touch OK on the Special Original popup menu.

Density Shift in the selected Original Image mode of the desired Colour mode is determined.
Use Adjustment Proof Copy to check the adjustment result before making multiple copies.
(1)
Touch Adjustment Proof Copy. The Basic Screen will be displayed, with the print quantity automatically set to 1.
(2) (3) (4)
Press [START]. A sample copy will be output. When printing is completed, the screen will resume the Image Adjustment Screen previously displayed. Repeat steps 1 to 3 till the copy result becomes satisfactory.
7-23
Changing Colours Using RGB and HSB Values (Colour
Changing Colours Using RGB and HSB Values (Colour Adjustment)

Change colour by modifying each value of red (R), green (G), and blue (B), and also adjust the value of hue, saturation, and brightness.
Modifying RGB Value

Change the colour of the copy image by modifying each value of red (R), green (G), and blue (B).
1.
Touch IMAGE ADJUST on the Basic Screen.
2.
Touch COLOUR ADJUST to display the Colour Adjustment Screen.
7-24

3. Touch the desired colour key.
4.
Touch the desired level key from -1 to -4 to make the colour lighter, or from +1 to +4 to make it deeper.
Touch STD. to select the middle level. Use Adjustment Proof Copy to check the adjustment result. See p. 7-22.
5.
Touch OK.
The Colour Adjustment Screen will be restored.
To resume the previous setting, touch CANCEL.
6.
Touch OK.
7-25

Modifying HSB Value
Change the colour of the copy image by making adjustments to Hue, Saturation, and Brightness.
1.
2.
Touch COLOUR ADJUST to display the Colour Adjustment Screen.
3.
Make an adjustment to Hue.

Touch HUE.
Touch the desired level key from -1 to -4 to make yellow closer to red, and red closer to magenta (Adjustment goes anticlockwise in the colour circle.). Or,
7-26

touch a key from +1 to +4 to make yellow closer to green, and green closer to cyan (Adjustment goes clockwise in the colour circle.).
Touch STD. to select the middle level.
Touch OK. The Colour Adjustment Screen will be restored.

4.
Make an adjustment to Saturation.

Touch SATURATION.
Touch the desired level key from -1 to -4 to make the colours dull, or from +1 to +4 to make them vivid.

5.
Make an adjustment to Brightness.

Touch BRIGHTNESS.
7-27

Touch the desired level key from -1 to -4 to make the image darker, or from +1 to +4 to make it brighter.

6.
Touch OK.
7-28
Changing Colours Using CMYK Value (Colour Balance
Changing Colours Using CMYK Value (Colour Balance Adjustment)

Change the hue by varying the images cyan (C), magenta (M), yellow (Y), and black (K) individually or mutually. This adjustment can be made in each density area (shadow, mid tone, or highlight) of the individual colour, or in the whole density area of each colour. The adjustment value ranges from -10 to +10.
1.
2.
Touch COLOUR BALANCE to display the Colour Balance Adjustment Screen.
7-29
Changing Colours Using CMYK Value (Colour Balance

3. Select the desired density area.
Check the shadow, mid tone, and highlight areas of the original, then select the desired density area to adjust the colour balance. If the adjustment is necessary for the whole density area, touch FULL AREA to highlight it.
4.
Select the colour and adjustment value.

Touch CYAN(C), MAGENTA(M), YELLOW(Y), or BLACK (K) to highlight it. Then, touch the + or , key to display the desired adjustment value from -10 to +10.
The adjustment can be made for each density area. Repeat steps 3 and 4, if desired. Select smaller number to make the colour lighter, or larger number to make it darker. Use Adjustment Proof Copy to check the adjustment result. See p. 7-22.
5.
Touch OK.
7-30
Selecting Line Screen, Dot Screen, or High Compression
Selecting Line Screen, Dot Screen, or High Compression (Screen Setting)

This machine provides two methods to reproduce the print image; Line Screen and Dot Screen. The machine selects an appropriate method automatically according to the other copy conditions selected for the job.
See p. 7-14 for details of Line Screen and Dot Screen.
Follow the procedure below to select the reproducing method manually. HIGH RESOLUTION / SMOOTH TONE Specify either High Resolution or Smooth Tone, when selecting the reproducing method manually. High Resolution improves the resolution by maximizing the number of lines drawn. Smooth Tone provides a high-performance colour grading by lowering the drawing lines. HIGH COMPRESSION The desired copy result may not be obtained because the internal memory overflows when using the reproducing method selected manually or automatically according to the other copy conditions of the job. In this case, select High Compression to give priority to compressing the scanned data. The Dither method is used instead of Line Screen or Dot Screen. AUTO Auto selects an appropriate reproducing method automatically according to the selected copy conditions. This mode is initially selected.
1.
7-31

2. Touch SCREEN to display the Screen Setting Screen.
3.
Select the desired reproducing method.

To select the Line Screen, touch HIGH RESOLUTION or SMOOTH TONE under the LINE SCREEN indication to highlight it.
To select the Dot Screen, touch HIGH RESOLUTION or SMOOTH TONE under the DOT SCREEN indication to highlight it.
7-32

To compress the scanned data, touch HIGH COMPRESSION to highlight it.
Touch AUTO to highlight it, if reproducing method should be selected automatically.

Use Adjustment Proof Copy to check the adjustment result. See p. 7-22.
4.
Touch OK.
7-33
Adjusting Sharpness and Contrast / Selecting Gloss Mode

In addition to the colour adjustment and reproducing method selection, this machine allows you to apply the following filters to improve the copy image quality. Sharpen the outline of the image. (Sharpness) Increase the contrast of the image. (Contrast) Increase shine on the image. (Gloss Mode) Follow the procedure below to make the adjustment.
See p. 7-16 for details of the Sharpness, Contrast, and Gloss mode.
1.
2.
Touch OTHERS to display the Other Adjustment Screen.
7-34
When the Gloss mode is specified, copy speed may vary depending on paper weight as follows: 64 g/m2 to 105 g/m2: One-second 106 g/m2 to 256 g/m2: One-third For more detailed information, contact your service representative.
3.
Select the desired sharpness level.

Touch SHARPNESS, then touch the desired level key from -1 to -4 to make the outline softer, or from +1 to +4 to make it sharper. Touch STD. to select the middle level. Touch OK.
4.
Select the desired contrast level.

Touch CONTRAST, then touch the desired level key from -1 to -4 to decrease the contrast, or from +1 to +4 to increase the contrast. Touch STD. to select the middle level. Touch OK.
7-35

5. Select the Gloss Mode.
Touch GLOSS MODE to highlight it.
6.
Touch OK.
7-36
Making Fine Adjustment in Image Detection (Image Judge)

Image Detection detects and determines the photo portion and text area of the original when scanned, allowing you to obtain the optimum print result by modifying the standard for detection according to the character size of the text or its proportion in the whole original. For this adjustment, two items are provided; Text/Photo proportion adjustment and Black/Colour text proportion adjustment. TEXT/PHOTO changes the ratio of detecting the text area of the original. COLOUR/TEXT changes the proportion in detecting that the original text is black or coloured.
Follow the procedure below to make the adjustment.
1.
2.
Touch OTHERS to display the Other Adjustment Screen.
7-37

3. Touch IMAGE JUDGE.
4.
Make an adjustment to TEXT/PHOTO.

Touch the desired level key from -1 to -4 to increase the proportion of photo. Or, touch a key from +1 to +4 to increase the proportion of text. Touch STD. to select the middle level.
Use Adjustment Proof Copy to check the adjustment result. See p. 7-22.
5.
Make an adjustment to COLOUR/BLACK.

Touch the desired level key from -1 to -4 to increase the proportion of black text, or from +1 to +4 to increase the proportion of coloured text. Touch STD. to select the middle level.
6.
Touch OK.
The Other Adjustment Screen will be restored.
7.
Touch OK.
7-38
Specifying Original Type (Original Image/Type in Special
Specifying Original Type (Original Image/Type in Special Original)

The image quality or type of the original may affect the copy result. Use Original Image to improve the image quality by specifying the original image type as follows. Originals including both text and photo (TEXT/PHOTO) Photo originals or originals mainly composed of photos (PHOTO) Text originals (TEXT) Coloured original with small text such as a map (MAP)
Use Original Type to improve the image quality by specifying the printed original type. Normal original (PRINTED) Photo-printed original (PHOTO PAPER) Copied original (COPIED PAPER) Original printed using Ink-jet printer (INKJET PAPER)
1. 2.
Touch SPECIAL ORIGINAL on the Basic Screen.

The Special Original popup menu will be displayed.
Touch the desired key in ORIG. IMAGE area and ORIG. TYPE area.
Only one selection can be made in each area.

In each ORIG. IMAGE mode, the copy density level can be shifted three levels darker or three levels lighter (Density Shift). See p. 7-22 for details.
3.
Touch OK.
7-39
Specifying Original Type (Original Image/Type in Special
The Basic Screen will be restored, with the SPECIAL ORIGINAL key highlighted and the selected Original Image icon displayed.
To resume the previous setting, touch CANCEL. To restore the initial settings
7-40
Advanced Information
How to Use Advanced Functions
Programmed Shut-Off (Weekly Timer) .................................................8-2 Rotation................................................................................................8-4 Vertical/Horizontal Zoom Mode ...........................................................8-6 Making Folded Booklet (Fold / Stitch & Fold) ......................................8-9 Punching File Holes in Copies (Punch) ..............................................8-12 Output Three-Folded Copies (Three-Fold).........................................8-15 Making Trimmed Booklets (Trimming)................................................8-17 Cover Sheet Feeding .........................................................................8-20 Off-Line Finishing...............................................................................8-23 Tray Adjustment .................................................................................8-26
Programmed Shut-Off (Weekly Timer)

The Weekly Timer function turns a copier on and off at the time specified by the Key Operator. This function is not factory-set. When the copier is using the Weekly Timer function, the TIMER indicator on the right side of the control panel is lit.
IMPORTANT: WHEN THE TIMER INDICATOR IS LIT, THE COPIER WILL TURN OFF AUTOMATICALLY. DO NOT TURN IT OFF BY PRESSING POWER SWITCH.
When the TIMER indicator light is on and other indicators are off, copying is unavailable due to the Weekly Timer function. However, copying can be available by using the following procedure.
1.
Press [POWER SAVER ON/OFF] on the control panel.
For details of the Weekly Timer function, see p. 14-27.
The Basic screen will be displayed along with the message shown below.
drowssap retnE e d o m t p urr et n i r em i T
8-2
The machine power will be turned off automatically 5 minutes after this message is shown if a password is not entered.
The Timer Interrupt password is not factory set and must be entered by the Key Operator. In the event the Timer Interrupt password has not been entered by the Key Operator, the following message will display instead.
) s( e t u n i m 5 0 ) s( r u o h 0 e mi t y p o c t u p n I ) s( e t u n i m 5 0 ) s( r u o h 0 e mi t y p o c t u p n I
When the above message displays, proceed to step 4.
2.
Enter the password.

Enter a 4-digit number Timer Interrupt password using the keypad on the control panel.
For setting the Timer Interrupt password, see p. 14-34.
If an invalid password is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit password.
3.
Press [START].
The following message will be displayed on the Basic Screen.
4.
Set the hour for the interrupt use.

Enter a 1-digit hour (ex. 3 hours is 3) using the keypad on the control panel. (0 ~ 9)
5. 6.
Press [START]. Set the minute for the interrupt use.

Enter a 2-digit minute (ex. 7 minutes is 07) using the keypad on the control panel. (00 ~ 59)
Entering a number smaller than 5 will set the minute at 5.
7. 8.
Press [START].
Copying is available until the set time is up.
When Timer Interrupt of the copier is finished, press [POWER SAVER ON/OFF] for one second or longer, then release it.
The copier returns to the OFF condition and copying is again disabled.
8-3
Rotation
Rotation
This function allows you to utilize APS or AMS and copy the original documents onto size A4 or B5, irrespective of the copy paper feeding direction.
By default, Rotation requires APS or AMS to function. The Key Operator can set this function ON, or to operate when APS, AMS or reduce functions. See p. 14-38.
Copy
Original Rotation copying
Copy
Original Rotation copying
Normal copying Normal copying
The copier is initially set to activate the Rotation function automatically. Follow the procedure below to release/resume this function.
8-4
Rotation
1. Touch ROTATION OFF on the Basic Screen to highlight it.
When Rotation is released, the Rotation icon on the Basic Screen will disappear to indicate that this function is cancelled.
2.
Touch to deselect ROTATION OFF to resume this function.

When Rotation is resumed, the Rotation icon will be displayed on the screen.
8-5
Vertical/Horizontal Zoom Mode

Use the Vertical/Horizontal zoom mode to reduce or enlarge vertical and horizontal dimensions, independently.
Vertical/Horizontal Zoom Mode Specifications

/ Vertical/Horizontal zoom range: 0.250~4.000 / Incompatible Conditions: APS, AMS, Reduce & Shift in Image Shift
The figure shown below is the sample image using the Vertical/Horizontal zoom.
1.
Touch ZOOM on the Basic Screen.

The popup menu for setting a zoom ratio will be displayed.
8-6

2. Touch the vertical zoom key on the popup menu to highlight it, then set the vertical zoom ratio.
Use the keypad on the popup menu to enter a 4-digit vertical zoom ratio, or use arrow keys (+/,) to scroll to the desired ratio. Similarly, touch the horizontal zoom key to highlight it, then set the horizontal zoom ratio.
3.
Touch OK.
The popup menu disappears automatically and the specified zoom ratio will be displayed on the Basic Screen.
4. 5.
6.
7.
Press [START].
8-7
The figure shown below is the sample image using the Vertical/Horizontal zoom with an original placed slanted on the platen glass.
8-8
Making Folded Booklet (Fold / Stitch & Fold)

The Fold and Stitch & Fold modes are available only when the FS-606 Finisher option is installed. When any of these modes is selected, the Booklet feature is automatically selected and indicated on the Application Selection Screen.
When copying two-sided signature originals using the Fold or Stitch & Fold mode, release the automatically selected Booklet mode on the Application Selection Screen. When copying dark originals or using Reverse Image mode together with Fold or Stitch & Fold mode, the folded line of the output copies may be slightly shifted.
The following copy results may be expected when using Fold or Stitch & Fold mode: In the Fold mode, each copied set is folded and output to the Booklet tray of the finisher. In the Stitch & Fold mode, each copied set is stapled at two positions (saddle stitched), then folded and output to the Booklet tray of the finisher.
Specifications for Fold / Stitch & Fold Mode

/ Use RADF. / Max. number of folded sheets in Fold mode 105 g/m2 paper or less: 3 sheets (less than in Stitch & Fold mode because they are not clinched first) / Max. number of folded sheets in Stitch & Fold mode 80 g/m2 paper: 20 sheets 19 sheets with a thick cover paper 2 105 g/m paper: 16 sheets 15 sheets with a thick cover paper / Paper size: A3, B4, A4R, 11x17, 8.5x14, 8.5x11R / Paper weight: 64 ~ 105 g/m2 (80 g/m2 paper is recommended) / Booklet tray capacity: When the Booklet tray capacity is exceeded, the finisher will stop operating. Select the appropriate print quantity by referring to the following capacities. Approx. 100 sheets max. (A3, B4, 11x17, 8.5x14 / 80 g/m2 paper) Fold: 33 sets max. of 3-sheet-folded booklet (33 x 3 = 99 sheets) Stitch & Fold: 20 sets max. of 5-sheet-folded booklet (20 x 5 = 100 sheets) 5 sets max. of 20-sheet-folded booklet (5 x 20 = 100 sheets) Approx. 75 sheets max. (A4R, 8.5x11R / 80 g/m2 paper) Fold: 25 sets max. of 3-sheet-folded booklet (25 x 3 = 75 sheets) Stitch & Fold: 15 sets max. of 5-sheet-folded booklet (15 x 5 = 75 sheets) / Incompatible conditions with Booklet selected: APS, 1)1, 2)1, ACS, Sort, Staple-sort, Group, Face Up, Three-Fold, Rotation Sort, Rotation Group, Punch, Back cover feeding, Mixed Original, Full Area in Non STD size, Tab Paper, Sheet/Cover Insertion, Combination, Program Job, Multi-Page Enlargement, Non-Image Area Erase, Reverse Image, Repeat / Incompatible conditions without Booklet: Sort, Staple-sort, Group, Face Up, Rotation Sort, Rotation Group, Three-Fold, Punch, Back cover feeding, Mixed Original, Dual Page, Program Job, Multi-Page Enlargement, Reverse Image
8-9

Fold Stitch & Fold
105 g/m2 or less: 3 sheet max.
80 g/m2: 20 sheets max. 19 sheets max. with a thick cover paper 105 g/m2: 16 sheets max. 15 sheets max. with a thick cover paper
1.
Touch OUTPUT MENU on the Basic Screen to display the Output Mode popup menu.
2.
Touch MAIN TRAY, if not highlighted.
3.
Touch STITCH & FOLD or FOLD, as desired.
8-10
Selecting FOLD or STITCH & FOLD will automatically switch the output tray to Booklet tray. Notice that the arrow pointing from the Main tray shifts to the Booklet tray.
When selecting STITCH & FOLD, the machine with the trimmer unit installed selects TRIM automatically. To cancel the trimming mode, touch TRIM to deselect it.
4.

The Basic Screen will be restored and the selection made in the output mode will be reflected in the OUTPUT icon area.
5.
Select additional copying features, as required.

NO COVER SHEET of Booklet is automatically selected. To change this selection, touch APPLICATION on the Basic Screen to display the Application Selection Screen, then touch Booklet twice to display the Booklet Mode Selection Screen to make another selection or to release the setting.
6.
7.
Position originals.
When loading originals, heed the following limits on capacity: Fold mode: 12 pages or less for simplex copying 6 pages or less for duplex copying Stitch & Fold mode: 80 pages or less for simplex copying (80 g/m2 paper only) 40 pages or less for duplex copying (80 g/m2 paper only) Exceeding the above capacity limits may cause trouble in the finisher.
8.
Press [START].
When the Booklet tray capacity is exceeded, the finisher will cease operating. To avoid this, select the appropriate print quantity from the specifications shown on p. 8-9.
8-11
Punching File Holes in Copies (Punch)

The Punch mode is available only when the PK-507/PK-508 Punching kit option is installed on the FS-513/FS-606 finisher. When the Punch mode is selected in combination with any of the Primary (Main) tray output modes, each copied sheet is punched and output to the Primary tray according to the selected output mode.
Some staple positions previously selected may conflict with this function. Special size paper (STD size (special), Non STD size, Wide size paper) cannot be punched. If the ATS (Automatic Tray Switching) functions while the machine uses the Punch mode, the punch holes may be slightly off the appropriate positions. Do not punch special paper type such as labels, tabbed sheets, etc. Otherwise, machine trouble may occur in Punching kit. Be sure that the paper guides of the paper tray are securely aligned to the paper; otherwise the copies may not be punched in position.
Specifications for Punch Mode

/ / / / / /
Copy paper size: A3, B4, F4, A4, B5 (80 g/m2 paper recommended) Paper weight: 64 g/m2 ~ 128 g/m2 Number of holes: 4 holes Hole diameter: 6.5 mm 0.5 mm Hole pitch: 80 mm 0.5 mm Incompatible Conditions: Using platen glass (available when using Platen store mode), Rotation Sort, Rotation Group, Fold, Stitch & Fold, Three-Fold, Cover Sheet mode, Output modes using secondary tray, Mixed Original (A4R, B5 mixed), Copy insertion mode in Chapter, Cover sheet mode in Booklet
1.
8-12

2. Touch MAIN TRAY, if not highlighted.
3.
Touch PUNCH to display the Punch Position popup menu.
4. 5. 6.
Touch the desired punch position key to highlight it. Touch OK on the Punch Position popup menu to restore the Output Mode popup menu. Touch OK on the Output Mode popup menu to complete the setting and return to the Basic Screen.
The selection made in punch position will be displayed in the OUTPUT icon area.
8-13

7. Specify the original set direction.
Touch SPECIAL ORIGINAL on the Basic Screen to display the Special Original popup menu. Touch to select the desired original set direction, then touch OK to return to the Basic Screen.
8. 9.
Select additional copying features, as required. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.
10. Position originals in the document feeder.

11. Press [START].

8-14
Output Three-Folded Copies (Three-Fold)

The Three-Fold mode is available only when the FS-606 Finisher option is installed. In this mode, the original image is copied on A4R/8.5x11R copy paper and output to the Booklet tray of the finisher.
Specifications for Three-Fold Mode
/ Copy paper size: A4R, 8.5x11R* (80 g/m2 paper recommended) * The service setting is required to use 8.5x11R paper in this mode. Please contact your service representative. / Max. number of folded sheets (80 g/m2 only): 3 sheets / Paper weight: 64 ~ 105 g/m2; Special stock (80 g/m2 paper is recommended) / Booklet tray capacity: 50 sets max. of 1-sheet-folded set (50 sheets) / Incompatible Conditions: Sort, Staple-sort, Group, Face Up, Rotation Sort, Rotation Group, Output modes using secondary tray, Fold, Stitch & Fold, Punch, Back cover feeding, Mixed Original, Dual Page, Program Job, MultiPage Enlargement, Reverse Image
Three-fold copie
1. 2. 3.
Load A4R or 8.5x11R copy paper in a tray. Touch OUTPUT MENU on the Basic Screen to display the Output Mode popup menu. Touch MAIN TRAY, if not highlighted.
8-15

4. Touch THREE-FOLD to highlight it.
5.
Touch OK on the popup menu to complete the setting and return to the Basic Screen.
The THREE-FOLD icon will be displayed in the OUTPUT icon area.
6. 7.

Touch to highlight the A4R or 8.5x11R tray key, if not already highlighted.
8.
Position originals.
Up to 3 originals can be three-folded.
9.
Press [START].
When the Booklet tray capacity is exceeded, the finisher will cease operating. To avoid this, select the appropriate print quantity from the specifications shown on p. 8-15.
8-16
Making Trimmed Booklets (Trimming)

The Trimming mode is available only when the TU-109 Trimmer unit option is installed on the FS-606 Finisher. This function can be used with Fold or Stitch & Fold mode to make each copied set folded or stitched & folded, trimmed at the edge that opens the booklet, then output to the Trimmer unit tray.
Specifications for Trimming Mode

/ Max. number of folded sheets in Fold and Trimming modes 105 g/m2 paper or less: 3 sheets / Max. number of folded sheets in Stitch & Fold and Trimming mode 80 g/m2 paper: 20 sheets 19 sheets with a thick cover paper 2 105 g/m paper: 16 sheets 15 sheets with a thick cover paper / Paper size: A3, B4, A4R, 11x17, 8.5x14, 8.5x11R (64 ~ 105 g/m2) / Trimmer unit tray capacity: When the Trimmer unit tray capacity is exceeded, the Finisher and Trimmer unit will stop operating. Select an appropriate print quantity by referring to the following capacities. Approx. 512 sheets max. (80 g/m2 paper) Fold and Trimming: 100 sets max. of 3-sheet-folded booklet (100 x 3 = 300 sheets max.) Stitch & Fold and Trimming: 100 sets max. of 2~5-sheet-folded booklet (100 x 5 = 500 sheets max.) 50 sets max. of 6~10-sheet-folded booklet (50 x 10 = 500 sheets max.) 32 sets max. of 11~16-sheet-folded booklet (32 x 16 = 512 sheets max.) 25 sets max. of 17~20-sheet-folded booklet(25 x 20 = 500 sheets max.) / Incompatible Conditions with Booklet selected: APS, 1)1, 2)1, ACS, Sort, Staple-sort, Group, Face Up, Rotation sort, Rotation group, Three-Fold, Punch, Back cover feeding, Mixed Original, Full Area in Non STD size, Tab Paper, Sheet/Cover Insertion, Combination, Program Job, Multi-Page Enlargement, Non-Image Area Erase, Reverse Image, Repeat / Incompatible conditions without Booklet: Sort, Staple-sort, Group, Face Up, Rotation Sort, Rotation Group, Three-Fold, Punch, Back cover feeding, Mixed Original, Dual Page, Program Job, Multi-Page Enlargement, Reverse Image
Fold and Trimming
Stitch & Fold and Trimming
8-17

1. 2. Touch OUTPUT MENU on the Basic Screen
The Output Mode popup menu will be displayed.
Touch MAIN TRAY, if not highlighted.
3.
Select the desired trimming mode.

Touch STITCH & FOLD or FOLD, as desired. When selecting FOLD, also touch TRIM to highlight it. When selecting STITCH & FOLD, the machine with the trimmer unit installed selects TRIM automatically.
When copying two-sided signature originals using the Fold or Stitch & Fold mode, release the automatically selected Booklet mode on the Application Selection Screen. When copying dark originals or using Reverse Image mode together with Fold or Stitch & Fold mode, the folded line of the output copies may be slightly shifted.
4.

The Basic Screen will be restored and the selection made in the output mode will be reflected in the OUTPUT icon area.
8-18

5. Select additional copying features, as required.
NO COVER SHEET of Booklet is initially selected. To change this selection, touch APPLICATION on the Basic Screen to display the Application Selection Screen, then touch Booklet twice to display the Booklet Mode Selection Screen to make another selection or to release the setting.
6.
7.
Position originals.
When loading originals, heed the following limits on capacity: Fold mode: 12 pages or less for simplex copying 6 pages or less for duplex copying Stitch & Fold mode: 80 pages or less for simplex copying (80 g/m2 paper only) 40 pages or less for duplex copying (80 g/m2 paper only) Exceeding the above capacity limits may cause trouble in the Finisher.
8.
Press [START].
When the Trimmer unit tray capacity is exceeded, the Finisher and Trimmer unit will cease operating. To avoid this, select the appropriate print quantity from the specifications shown on p. 8-17.
8-19
Cover Sheet Feeding
Cover Sheet Feeding

The Cover Sheet Feeder (PI-110) is available as an option on the FS-513/FS-606 finisher. Load cover sheet paper into this device and use the sheets as front covers for copied sets output to the Main tray or use the sheets as booklet-type covers for copied sets output to the Booklet tray in the Fold or Stitch & Fold mode.
Paper loaded into the cover sheet feeder cannot be copied. This function is incompatible with cover sheet mode (COVER WITH COPY SHEET and COVER WITH BLANK SHEET) in Booklet and cover mode in Sheet/Cover Insertion.
Specifications for Cover Sheet Feeding

/ Cover paper size: Upper tray: A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5*, 8.5x11, 8.5x11R, 5.5x8.5* Lower tray: A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5*, 12x18, 11x17, 8.5x14, 8.5x11, 8.5x11R, 5.5x8.5 * *A5 and 5.5x8.5 paper sizes are available in portrait type feeding only. / Cover paper weight: 50 ~ 200 g/m2 cover paper / Tray capacity: 200 sheets (200 g/m2 cover paper) or 30mm thick for both trays / Incompatible Conditions: Group, Rotation Sort, Rotation Group, Output to Secondary (sub) tray, Punch, Cover mode in Sheet/Cover Insertion, Cover sheet mode in Booklet, Multi-Page Enlargement / Incompatible with Back cover feeding: Fold, Stitch&Fold, Three-Fold
Copied set with cover attached
Cover sheet
Copied sets with cover attached in Fold or Stitch & Fold mode
1.
8-20
Cover Sheet Feeding

2. Touch MAIN TRAY, if not highlighted.
3. 4.
Touch COVER SHEET to display the Cover Sheet Insert Selection Screen. Touch FRONT, FRONT+BACK, or BACK to highlight it, then select the covers tray.
When selecting FRONT+BACK mode, different tray sources can be specified for each.
Copy paper sizes available to be loaded are different in each tray. See the specifications on p. 8-20.
5. 6. 7.
Touch OK to restore the Output Mode popup menu. Touch OK on the Output Mode popup menu.
8-21
Cover Sheet Feeding

8. Load the cover sheet paper into the optional cover sheet feeder of the FS-513/FS-606 finisher.
Upper tray Lower tray
If the paper size loaded in the cover sheet feeder is not suitable, the following messages will be displayed and copying will be unavailable till the correct size is loaded.
r e d ee f t e e h s r e v o c n i t e e h s r e v o c d a o l e s a el P
9.
10. Position originals.

11. Press [START].

8-22
r e p a p d e t c el e s d n a t e e h s r e v o c n e e w t e b e zi s r e p a p t p a d A
Off-Line Finishing
Off-Line Finishing
The Off-Line Finishing function enables you to finish documents independent of copier operation. The Off-Line Finishing function is available only with the Cover Sheet Feeder option (PI-110) installed on the FS-513/FS-606 Finisher. To use this convenient function, simply place a set of paper into the lower tray of the cover sheet feeder, select the desired mode from the Off-Line Finishing operation panel located on the top of the finisher, then press the Start/Stop button. Available finishing modes according to the optional configuration are described below. FS-513 Finisher + PI-110 Cover Sheet Feeder - 1 oblique staple: Primary (main) tray - 2 parallel staples: Primary (main) tray FS-513 Finisher + PI-110 Cover Sheet Feeder + PK-507/PK-508 Punching Kit - 1 oblique staple - 2 parallel staples - Punch FS-606 Finisher + PI-110 Cover Sheet Feeder - 1 oblique staple - 2 parallel staples - Stitch & Fold (2 staples in the centre + Fold) - Three-Fold FS-606 Finisher + PI-110 Cover Sheet Feeder+ PK-507/PK-508 Punching Kit - 1 oblique staple - 2 parallel staples - Stitch & Fold (2 staples in the centre + Fold) - Three-Fold - Punch
Specifications for Manual Stapling 1 oblique staple and 2 parallel staples

/ Paper size: A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5*, 12x18, 11x17, 8.5x14, 8.5x11, 8.5x11R *A5 paper is available in portrait type feeding only. / Paper weight: 50 ~ 80 g/m2 / Staple capacity: 50 sheets max. 49 sheets max. with a thick (200 g/m2 paper) front cover / Output tray: Primary (main) tray
Specifications for Manual Punch

/ Paper size: A3 to B5 / Paper weight: 50 ~ 128* g/m2 *Some paper types may not be punched easily. / Tray capacity: 200 sheets max. (200 g/m2 paper) or within 30mm thick / Output tray: Primary (main) tray
8-23
Off-Line Finishing
Specifications for Manual Stitch & Fold mode
/ Paper size: A3, B4, A4R, 12x18, 11x17, 8.5x14, 8.5x11R / Paper weight: 60 ~ 200 g/m2 / Staple capacity:20 sheets max. (80 g/m2 paper) 19 sheets max. (80 g/m2 paper with a thick paper cover) 16 sheets max. (105 g/m2 paper) 15 sheets max. (105 g/m2 paper with a thick paper cover) / Output tray: Booklet tray
Specifications for Manual Three-Fold

/ / / / Paper size: A4R, 8.5x11R Paper weight: 60 ~ 105 g/m2 Three-fold capacity: 3 sheets Output tray: Booklet tray
Start/Stop button
Stitch & Fold
1 oblique staple
2 parallel staples Three-Fold Punch
1.
Place a set of paper to be finished into the lower tray of the cover sheet feeder, as described below for each mode.
Lower tray
Guide plate
oblique staple / 2 parallel staples: FACE UP Punch: FACE UP Stitch & Fold: FACE UP for the outside of the finished set Three-Fold: FACE UP for the outside of the folded set Align the guide plate. The indicator light of Start/Stop button will turn green.
Refer to the specifications on previous page for available paper size and capacity in each mode.
8-24
Off-Line Finishing
2. Press Staple Mode Selection button and/or Punch button to select the desired mode.
Punch mode is compatible with 1 oblique staple, 2 parallel staples, or Stitch & Fold mode.
3.
Press Start/Stop button.

Finished sheets will be delivered to the appropriate tray according to the selected mode.
If you want to stop the Off-Line Finishing operation, press the Start/Stop button again. The finisher will cease operating. When using Stitch & Fold mode, the unfinished set will be left in the stacker unit inside the finisher.
When the Booklet tray capacity is exceeded, the finisher will cease operating. To avoid this, select the appropriate print quantity from the specifications on p. 8-9 and p. 8-15.
8-25
Tray Adjustment
Tray Adjustment
This function allows you to perform image adjustments for printing on pages contained in a specific paper tray and enables you to recall adjustment values from the Basic Screen. The Tray Adjustment key will appear on the Basic Screen if this function has been enabled by your service representative. Contact your service representative, if desired.
To Set the Adjustment Value

1. Touch Tray Adjustment on the Basic Screen to display the Tray Adjustment popup menu.
2.
Touch the desired tray key, then set the adjustment value.
Touch Side 1 or Side 2 to select the side of copy paper. Touch the desired adjustment item key to highlight it, then use the plus/minus, up/down arrow keys and control panel keypad to enter the desired adjustment value. Use Reset to clear the incorrect entry.
3.
Touch Store.
The Profile Name Entry Screen will be displayed.
8-26
Tray Adjustment
4. Enter the desired profile name.
Use the screen keypad to enter the desired profile name. Max. 12 letters can be entered. Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Tray Adjustment popup menu.
5.
Touch OK.
The Basic Screen will be restored, indicating the registered tray number on the Tray Adjustment key.
8-27
Tray Adjustment
To Recall/Delete the Adjustment Value
1. Touch Tray Adjustment on the Basic Screen to display the Tray Adjustment popup menu.
2.
Touch the desired tray key, then touch Recall/Delete.
The Profile List Screen will be displayed.
3.
Touch the number (profile name) key to highlight it, then touch RECALL or DELETE, as desired.
When RECALL is touched, the Tray Adjustment popup menu will be restored, with the selected adjustment value recalled in the text area.
8-28
Tray Adjustment
When DELETE is touched, the Delete Confirmation popup menu will be displayed. Touch YES to delete the selected profile name, then touch CANCEL to restore the Tray Adjustment popup menu.
4.
Touch OK on the Tray Adjustment popup menu to complete the setting and return to the Basic Screen.
8-29
Tray Adjustment
8-30
Special Original
How to Make a Copy of Special Original
Selecting Binding Direction..................................................................9-2 Specifying Original Direction................................................................9-4 Copying Non-Standard Size Originals (Original Form) ........................9-6 Copying Mixed Size Originals (Mixed Original)....................................9-9 Copying Z-Folded Originals (Z-Folded Original) ................................9-12 Scanning Thin/Thick Originals in RADF (Original Thickness).............9-14
Selecting Binding Direction

When copying in 2)1 or 2)2 mode, specify the binding direction of the originals on the Special Original popup menu to obtain the desired copy result. RIGHT&LEFT BIND is initially selected to make copies in the same direction as the originals.
1.

2.
Touch to highlight the desired binding direction key.
3.
Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Basic Screen.

The SPECIAL ORIGINAL key on the Basic Screen is highlighted, and the icon in the message area indicates the selected original direction.
4.
Make other compatible selections.
9-2

6.
Position originals FACE UP in the document feeder or FACE DOWN on the platen glass.
7.
Press [START].
9-3
Specifying Original Direction

Specify the direction of the originals placed on RADF or platen glass. This setting is required to obtain copy results as expected when making doublesided copies with binding position specified or when staple position is specified.
Originals on RADF:
Originals on platen glass:
1.

2.
Touch to highlight the desired original direction key.
9-4

3. Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Basic Screen.
The SPECIAL ORIGINAL key on the Basic Screen is highlighted, and the icon in the message area indicates the selected original direction.
4. 5.
Make other compatible selections. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.
6.
Position originals FACE UP in the document feeder or FACE DOWN on the platen glass according to the original direction specified in step 2.
See the illustration on previous page, and p. 3-4 for details on positioning originals.
7.
Press [START].
9-5
Copying Non-Standard Size Originals (Original Form)

The copier usually detects the standard size of originals fed through RADF or positioned on the platen glass (STD size mode). Use Non STD size mode to specify the scanning area manually for copying or printing special size originals. Use Tab paper mode to copy a tabbed original, including the image of the tab part, onto tabbed copy paper.
Specifications for Original Form

/ Tab extension width: 12.5 mm or less / Incompatible with Non STD Size: Mixed Original, Z-Folded Original, Tab Paper, Storing image in Overlay Memory / Incompatible with FULL AREA: APS, AMS, Rotation Sort, Rotation Group, Mixed Original, Z-Folded Original, Tab Paper, Combination, Booklet, Dual Page, Non-Image Area Erase, Image Shift / Incompatible with Tab Paper: 2)2, 2)1, APS, AMS, ACS, Single Colour, Full Colour, Original Type in Special Original, Mixed Original, Z-Folded Original, Non STD Size, Sheet/Cover Insertion, Chapter, Combination, Booklet, Image Insert, Dual Page, Multi-Page Enlargement, Storing image in Overlay Memory
1.

2.
Touch SPECIAL SETTING.
9-6

3. Touch Non STD size or Tab paper.
The popup menu will appear for Non STD size or Tab paper size setting.
4.
Touch the desired size key.

When selecting FULL AREA on the Non STD size mode menu, the copier scans the full area of the platen glass and copies with the paper size or magnification ratio currently selected.
5. 6. 7. 8.
Touch OK on the popup menu to complete the setting.

The popup menu will disappear.
Touch OK on the Special Setting popup menu to complete the setting. Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Basic Screen. Load copy paper.
To load tabbed copy paper in the Multi-sheet bypass tray, specify the paper type as Tab paper. See p. 3-20. To load tabbed copy paper in any other tray, specify the paper type as Tab paper in the Key Operator mode. See p. 14-22. For the procedure of tabbed copy paper supply, see p. 2-31.
9-7

10. Position original(s) FACE UP in the document feeder, or FACE DOWN on the platen glass.
11. Press [START].

9-8
Copying Mixed Size Originals (Mixed Original)

Use the Mixed original mode with the document feeder or with Store mode to copy mixed size originals. Each original in the mixed set will be copied to paper of the same size (APS mode) or to paper of desired size with appropriate ratio automatically selected (AMS mode).
Specifications for Mixed Original

/ Use RADF. / Combination of original sizes to be mixed depends on the width of the RADF original guides. See p. 12-11 for details. / Incompatible Conditions: Rotation Sort, Rotation Group, Fold, Stitch & Fold, Trimming, Three-Fold, Punch (B6R mixed), Z-Folded Original, Non STD Size, Tab Paper, Sheet/Cover Insertion, Chapter, Combination, Booklet, Image Insert, Dual Page, Program Job, Multi-Page Enlargement, Non-Image Area Erase, Repeat, AUTO Layout, Reduce&Shift in Image Shift, Overlay, Storing image in Overlay Memory
Mixed size originals
APS mode Automatically select the paper of the same size as that of the original.
AMS mode Automatically select magnification ratio to copy onto the same paper in size.
1.

9-9

2. Touch SPECIAL SETTING.
The Special Setting popup menu will be displayed.
3.
Touch Mixed Original, then touch OK.
The Special Original popup menu will be restored.
4. 5.
Touch OK to return to the Basic Screen. Select additional copying features, as desired.
APS is automatically selected on the Basic Screen. To select AMS, touch the tray key on the Basic Screen to select the desired paper size.
6.
7.
Position mixed original(s) FACE UP in the document feeder.

9-10

8. Press [START].
When the finisher / paper exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur.
9-11
Copying Z-Folded Originals (Z-Folded Original)

Use the Z-folded original mode with the document feeder to copy Z-folded originals. Otherwise, the size detection sensor of the RADF may function incorrectly. This mode requires more scanning time to detect the original size.
Specifications for Z-Folded Original

/ Use RADF. / Incompatible Conditions: Using platen glass, Rotation Sort, Rotation Group, Mixed Original, Non STD Size, Tab Paper, Multi-Page Enlargement, NonImage Area Erase, Repeat, AUTO Layout, Storing image in Overlay Memory
Z-folded original
1.

2.
9-12

3. Touch Z-Folded original, then touch OK.
4. 5. 6.
Touch OK to return to the Basic Screen. Select additional copying features, as desired. Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.
7.
Position Z-folded original(s) FACE UP in the document feeder.

8.
Press [START].
9-13
Scanning Thin/Thick Originals in RADF (Original Thickness)

Use the Thin or Thick original mode with the document feeder to copy thin or thick originals. Otherwise, the originals may be misfed in the document feeder.
Specifications for Original Thickness

/ Use RADF. / Incompatible Copying Conditions: None
1.

2.
3.
Touch Thick or Thin as required, then touch OK.
4. 5.
Touch OK to return to the Basic Screen. Select additional copying features, as desired.
9-14

7.
Position original(s) FACE UP in the document feeder.

8.
Press [START].
9-15
9-16
10
Applications
How to Use Application Functions
To Display Application Selection Screen ...........................................10-2 Inserting Sheets and Covers (Sheet/Cover Insertion)........................10-4 Locating Title Pages on the Right Side (Chapter)..............................10-8 Lay Out Several Pages onto One Sheet (Combination)...................10-11 Making a Multiple Page Signature Booklet (Booklet).......................10-15 Inserting Images into Printed Sets (Image Insert) ............................10-19 Dividing an Image into Right and Left Pages (Dual Page) ...............10-23 Programming Different Settings for an Output Job (Program Job) .10-27 Dividing an Image for Enlarged Copy (Multi-Page Enlargement).....10-30 Erasing Outside of the Original (Non-Image Area Erase).................10-34 Reversing Colour in Image (Reverse Image)....................................10-36 Repeating Selected Image Area (Repeat: Vert./Horiz. Mode)..........10-38 Repeating (Repeat: AUTO/Repeat Mode)........................................10-41 Eliminating Copy Marks (Frame/Fold Erasure) ................................10-44 Copying Image in the Centre of Copy Paper (AUTO Layout) ..........10-47 Adjusting Position of Copy Image (Image Shift) ..............................10-49 Reducing Images to Create Binding Margin (Reduce&Shift) ...........10-52 Printing Stamp, Page, Date/Time onto Copies (Stamp) ..................10-55 Printing Watermark onto Copies (Stamp) ........................................10-62 Overlaying an Image onto Each Page Copied in the Job (Overlay) .10-67 Storing Overlay Image in HDD (Overlay Memory)............................10-70
To Display Application Selection Screen

Follow the procedure below to display the Application Selection Screen and select the desired copying features.
1.
Touch APPLICATION on the Basic Screen.
The Application Selection Screen will be displayed on the touch panel.
When a function key is touched, it becomes highlighted. If you touch a function key, another screen or two will display to enable you to enter the appropriate settings. Check BOOK MARK in the message area of the subsequent screen, if desired, so that the screen may be directly accessed from the Check Screen to change the setting you made. If one function on the menu is incompatible with another, it will appear dimmed. The APPLICATION key on the Basic Screen will be highlighted when application selections have been made.
To restore the original copying conditions, touch CANCEL. To clear all Application settings, touch ALL CLEAR.
2.
Touch OK on the Application Selection Screen.

Selections will be completed and the Basic Screen will be restored.
10-2
With the Basic Screen displayed, you can press [START] to perform the operation.
10-3
Inserting Sheets and Covers (Sheet/Cover Insertion)

Use Sheet/Cover Insertion in copy mode or blank mode to insert chapter sheets or separator sheets into the finished set, as well as front and back covers.
Specifications for Sheet/Cover Insertion

/ Use RADF. / Trays for copy paper, front/back covers, and insertions should have the same paper size loaded. AMS (Automatic Magnification Selection) is automatically selected. / Max. insert sheets: 30 locations, from 1~999, including front and back covers / Incompatible Conditions: APS, Group, Rotation Sort, Rotation Group, Fold/ Stitch&Fold/ Trimming (with Booklet selected), Mixed Original, Tab Paper, Combination, Booklet, Image Insert, Dual Page, Program Job, Multi-Page Enlargement, Non-image Area Erase, Repeat (except 2/4/8 Repeat), AUTO Layout, Overlay, Storing Image in Overlay Memory
FRONT COVER COPIED FRONT COVER BLANK
Originals
Copies BACK COVER COPIED
Originals
Copies BACK COVER BLANK
Originals Copies COPY SHEET INSERTION
Originals Copies BLANK SHEET INSERTION
Originals
Copies
Originals
Copies
Combination samples: FRONT & BACK COVERS COPIED, AND COPY SHEET INSERTION
FRONT & BACK COVERS BLANK, AND BLANK SHEET INSERTION
10-4

1. Load regular sheets into any tray, and insertion sheets and covers into each tray source to be designated on the Sheet/Cover Insertion Screen.
When using thick paper or tabbed paper for covers or insertions, load them in the Multi-sheet bypass tray, unless previously specified and loaded in any other tray. Be sure that the trays for copy paper, front/back covers, and insertions have the same paper size loaded.
2.

3.
Touch Sheet/Cover Insertion on the Application Selection Screen.
The Sheet/Cover Insertion Screen will be displayed.
4.
Select the desired cover mode.
Example: Touch FRONT COPY to insert a copied front cover.
10-5

5. Touch CHANGE OF THE TRAY to select the cover sheet tray source.
The tray source for covers currently selected is displayed on the Sheet/Cover Insertion Screen. Every touch of the key shifts the selection in the display that includes paper type as specified in Key Operator mode. If no insertion is desired, proceed to step 8.
6.
When selecting Insertion mode: Enter the page number.
Touch to select the desired insertion mode, then use the control panel keypad to enter the page number of insertion location. Touch SET after each entry to move to the next key. To clear an incorrect entry, touch DELETE. The insertion location will be deleted.
Entering Page Numbers Fifteen keys are displayed on the screen to designate each insertion location. When setting more than 15 locations, touch the arrow key to move to the next page. The first (upper left) key displays the Front Cover icon if selected. The Back Cover icon appears, if selected, as the last (fixed) key, with one active blank key preceding it. Example: If p. 4 is entered in blank mode, a blank sheet will be inserted between p. 4 and p. 5; in copy mode, a copied sheet is inserted at p. 4.
NOTES:
The page numbers entered at random will be sorted automatically. Entering 0 or the same page number twice will be ignored on the screen. When a page number entered is larger than the total original page count, it will be ignored.
7.
Touch CHANGE OF THE TRAY to select the insertion tray source.

The tray source for covers currently selected is displayed on the Sheet/Cover Insertion Screen. Every touch of the key shifts the selection in the display that includes paper type as specified in Key Operator mode.
10-6

8. When all settings are completed, touch OK to return to the Application Selection Screen.
9.
10. Position originals FACE UP in the document feeder.

For details on positioning originals, see p. 3-4. Use RADF store mode (p. 3-38) when the original count exceeds 100.
11. Press [START].

10-7
Locating Title Pages on the Right Side (Chapter)

Chapter is used with RADF in 1)2 mode for the purpose of locating title pages on the right side, rather than reverse side, of a duplex copy to improve the presentation of double-sided copies. To effectively locate the title page on the right, a blank sheet will be automatically created on the reverse side of a sheet, if required.
Specifications for Chapter

/ Use RADF. / Max. title pages: 30 sheets, from 1 ~ 999 / Use STAMP together with this function to print chapter number onto chapter page in addition to page number, numbering, or watermark numbering. See p. 10-55. / Incompatible Conditions: 1)1, 2)1, Group, Rotation Sort, Rotation Group, Face Up, Mixed Original, Tab Paper, Combination, Image Insert, Program Job, Multi-Page Enlargement, Non-Image Area Erase, Repeat, Storing Image in Overlay Memory
1-sided originals Copies in Chapter mode
Title pages
Title pages
1.

10-8

2. Touch Chapter on the Application Selection Screen.
The Chapter Insertion Setting No. Screen will be displayed.
3.
Use the control panel keypad to enter the page number of each title page.
Touch SET after each entry to move to the next key. When setting more than 15 locations, touch the arrow key to move to the next page. To clear an incorrect entry, touch DELETE. The entered number will be deleted.
Entering 0 or the same page number twice will be ignored on the screen. Chapter insertions occur in sequence even if original page numbers are entered out of sequence. When a page number is larger than the total original page count, insertion occurs as the last page of the document. Touch Booklet on the Chapter Insertion Setting No. Screen to use this function.
10-9

To change the selection of paper tray for copying title pages, touch COPIED INSERT on the screen. In this case, you can touch CHANGE OF THE TRAY to change the currently selected paper tray displayed on the screen.
4. 5. 6.
When all entries are made, touch OK.

The Application Selection Screen will be restored.

7.

8.
Press [START].
10-10
Lay Out Several Pages onto One Sheet (Combination)

Use this function to lay out and copy a fixed number (2, 4, or 8) of pages onto one sheet of copy paper (2 in 1, 4 in 1, or 8 in 1).
Specifications for Combination

/ Use RADF. / AMS is automatically selected. (Normally the fixed size of Tray 1 will be selected.) / Incompatible Conditions: ACS, APS, Group, Rotation Sort, Rotation Group, Fold/ Stitch&Fold/ Trimming (with Booklet selected), Mixed Original, Tab Paper, Sheet/Cover Insertion, Chapter, Booklet, Image Insert, Dual page, Program Job, Multi-Page Enlargement, Non-Image Area Erase, Repeat, Overlay, Storing Image in Overlay Memory
4 in 1 copying 2 in 1 copying 8 in 1 copying
Original
1.
2.
Touch Combination on the Application Selection Screen.
The Combination Mode Selection Screen will be displayed.
10-11

3. Select the desired Combination mode.
Touch 2 in 1, 4 in 1 or 8 in 1 in the desired order area, referring to the illustration on the following page.
4. 5.
Touch OK.

AMS is automatically selected. When selecting any tray other than the one that is set and displayed on the Basic Screen, touch the desired tray key.
10-12

6. Select the desired original direction.
Touch SPECIAL ORIGINAL on the Basic Screen to display the Special Original popup menu. Touch to select the desired original direction, then touch OK to return to the Basic Screen.
7.
8.

9.
Press [START].
10-13
Original Type and Layout Order Refer to the table below to select the desired Combination mode.
Layout Original Portrait type 2 in 1 Horizontal order 4 in 1 8 in 1 Vertical order 4 in 1 8 in 1
Landscape type
10-14
Making a Multiple Page Signature Booklet (Booklet)

Use the Booklet to make a multiple page signature booklet on both sides of paper from any tray unless it is specified as Thick (210 ~ 256 g/m2 paper) or Tab paper of the paper type in the Key Operator mode. Original images are scanned into memory and automatically arranged in booklet format in correct order.
Specifications for Booklet

/ Use RADF. / Original pages should be a multiple of 4 in 1-2 mode or a multiple of 2 in 2-2 mode; otherwise blank pages are automatically inserted to the last. / AMS is automatically selected. Select the desired paper size. / Incompatible Conditions: ACS, APS, 1)1, 2)1, Group, Rotation Sort, Rotation Group, Face Up, Cover sheet feeder with Cover mode in Booklet, Mixed Original, Tab Paper, Sheet/Cover Insertion, Combination, Program Job, Multi-Page Enlargement, Non-Image Area Erase, Repeat, Storing Image in Overlay Memory
1-sided originals
Booklet copying
2-sided originals
1.
Load Copy Paper.

Load the desired copy paper size in a tray. When selecting cover sheet mode (Cover sheet (Copy sheet) or Cover sheet (Blank sheet)), load the same size paper in any other tray unless it is specified as Thick or Tab paper of the paper type in the Key Operator mode.
2.
10-15

3. Touch Booklet on the Application Selection Screen.
4.
Touch to highlight the desired Booklet mode key.
When a cover sheet is required, touch CHANGE OF THE PAPER TRAY to select the cover sheet tray source. Touch the desired output order key if you want to change the output order.
5.
Touch OK.
The Application Selection Screen will be restored. Select additional Applications, as desired.
Key Operator can set the machine to position the page numbers automatically on the outside edges of the copy when using Booklet with Page Numbering in Stamp. See p. 14-38.
6.

The Basic Screen will be restored. AMS is selected automatically.
7. 8.
Select the tray in which you loaded copy paper in step 1.

To release AMS, select the desired magnification, then select paper size.
Select the 1 )2 or 2 )2 copy mode.
10-16
If the copier is equipped with FS-606 Finisher, Fold or Stitch & Fold output mode is available. Follow the procedure on p. 10-15 to use the function.
9.
10. Position originals FACE UP in the document feeder.

Original pages should be a multiple of 4 in 1-2 mode or a multiple of 2 in 2-2 mode; otherwise blank pages are automatically inserted to the last.
When loading originals, heed the following limits on capacity: Fold mode 12 pages or less for simplex copying 6 pages or less for duplex copying Stitch & Fold mode 80 pages or less for simplex copying 40 pages or less for duplex copying Exceeding the above limits on capacity may cause misfeeds in the finisher.
11. Press [START].

When the Booklet / Trimmer unit tray capacity is exceeded, the finisher / trimmer unit will cease operating. To avoid such trouble, select an appropriate print quantity from the specifications on p. 125.
The roller drive unit is located inside the Booklet tray of the finisher. DO NOT put your hand into the roller drive unit when removing folded or stapled & folded sheets; otherwise, you may be injured.
Selecting Fold / Stitch & Fold Mode
10-17

1 Touch OUTPUT MENU on the Basic Screen to display the Output Mode popup menu, then touch MAIN TRAY to highlight it. 2 Touch STITCH & FOLD or FOLD, as desired.
NOTE: Selecting FOLD or STITCH & FOLD will automatically switch the output tray to Booklet tray. Notice that the arrow shown beside the Main tray shifts to the Booklet tray. 3 Touch OK on the Output Mode popup menu. The Basic Screen will be restored with the OUTPUT MENU highlighted.
10-18
Inserting Images into Printed Sets (Image Insert)

Use the Image insert mode to combine images scanned from the platen glass, such as photos, paste-ups, newspaper articles, graphs, etc., with images scanned from the document feeder. Then, output the combined images as a finished set. The selected copy paper size is determined by the size of originals loaded in the document feeder.
Specifications for Image Insert

/ Use RADF and platen glass. / Max. image insert: 30 locations, from p. 1 to p. 999 / Incompatible Conditions: Group, Rotation Sort, Rotation Group, Mixed Original, Tab Paper, Sheet/Cover Insertion, Chapter, Combination, Dual Page, Program Job, Multi-Page Enlargement, Non-Image Area Erase, Repeat, AUTO Layout, Overlay, Storing Image in Overlay Memory
1-sided originals placed on RADF Insertion originals on platen glass
2-sided originals placed on RADF
1.
10-19

2. Touch Image Insert on the Application Selection Screen.
The Image Insertion No. Setting Screen will be displayed.
3.
Use the control panel keypad to enter the page number.
Touch SET after each entry to move to the next key. When setting more than 15 locations, touch the arrow key to move to the next page. To clear an incorrect entry, touch DELETE. The entered page number will be deleted.
Entering Page Numbers For example, if insertion locations are [2/2/6], scanned platen images will be inserted as follows: The first scanned platen image will be inserted after page 2. The second scanned platen image will be inserted directly after the first scanned Image insertion. The third scanned platen image will be inserted after page 6.
NOTES:
When a page number is larger than the total original count, a sheet is inserted as the last page. Insertions occur in sequence, even if page numbers are entered out of sequence. Entering the same page number twice will insert two sheets at that location.
10-20
Touch Booklet on the Image Insertion No. Setting Screen to use this function.
4. 5.
When all page number entries are made, touch OK.


The Basic Screen will be restored. The STORE key on the Basic Screen appears highlighted to show that the Store mode is automatically selected.
6.
7.
Scan the document feeder images: Position originals FACE UP in the document feeder.
If the number of originals exceeds 100, divide them into blocks not exceeding 100 sheets and load them from the block with the first page.
8. 9.
Press [START].
The originals positioned in the document feeder will be scanned into memory.
Scan the platen glass images.

Open the document feeder. Position an original FACE DOWN on the platen glass, then close the document feeder.
PLACE AND SCAN THE ORIGINALS IN ORDER.
10. Press [START]. 11. Repeat steps 9 and 10 for all originals.
Memory overflow may occur during scanning. See p. 5-11. Should memory overflow occur frequently, it is recommended that you contact your service representative to extend the memory capacity in your machine.
12. Touch STORE to exit the Store mode. 13. Press [START].
The copier will start printing when ready for output.
10-21
10-22
Dividing an Image into Right and Left Pages (Dual Page)

The Dual Page mode performs image division on the original image. Use this function to copy an open book or a ledger sheet onto two A4 sheets in 1)1 or 2)1 mode, or onto the front and back sides of one A4 sheet in 1)2 or 2)2 mode. The following three modes can be selected from the Dual Page Screen. Facing Pages mode: Image division starts from the first scan. Front Cover+Facing Pages mode: Image division starts from the second scan, after the first scan copies normally. Front/Back Cover+Facing Pages mode: Image division starts from the third scan, after the first and second scan copy normally.
Specifications for Dual Page

/ Store mode is automatically selected. / Paper size: A4 / Incompatible Conditions: APS, AMS, Rotation Sort, Rotation Group, Fold/ Stitch&Fold/Trimming (available with Booklet selected), Mixed Original, Tab Paper, Sheet/Cover Insertion, Combination, Image Insert, Program Job, Multi-Page Enlargement, Repeat, Reduce & Shift in Image Shift, Overlay, Storing Image in Overlay Memory
Set original 1-1 / 2-1 mode
1-1 / 2-1 mode
1.
10-23

2. Touch Dual Page on the Application Selection Screen.
The Dual Page Screen will be displayed.
3.
Select the desired Dual Page mode.
Touch to highlight the desired mode key.
4.
Touch Output-n to 1 or Output-1 to n to select the output order according to the original pagination.
Touch Booklet on the Dual Page Screen to use this function.
5. 6.
Touch OK.

The Basic Screen will be restored. APS and AMS are automatically released, and the STORE key appears highlighted to show that the Store mode is automatically selected.
10-24

7. Select the desired copy mode and magnification.
Available paper size is A4. When selecting Facing pages mode and scanning from the platen glass, select 1)1 or 1)2 copy mode. APS and AMS are released and 1.000 magnification is selected automatically. Change the magnification manually, if desired.
8.
9.
When using platen glass to scan, position the first page FACE DOWN with document feeder kept open. When using document feeder, position original(s) FACE UP. For details on scanning originals in Front cover + Facing pages and Front/Back Cover + Facing pages mode, see the description on the following page.
10. Press [START] to scan. 11. Repeat steps 9 and 10 for all originals.
When using platen glass, Non-Image Area Erase and AUTO Layout are automatically selected. DO NOT CLOSE the document feeder throughout the scanning job.
The copier will start printing when ready for output. When the finisher / paper exit tray capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets as they exit; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur.
Scanning Original for Cover Use platen glass for scanning original for cover. 1 2 3 4 Open the document feeder. Position original for front cover FACE DOWN on the platen glass. Press [START] to start scanning. When Front/Back Cover + Facing pages is selected, scan original for back cover according to the above steps 2 and 3. 5 Use platen glass or document feeder, as required, for scanning body text originals. To output the set in the same order as the originals, start scanning from the first page.
10-25

6 Press [START] to start scanning. 7 Repeat steps 5 and 6 for subsequent originals.
Front cover + Facing pages Scan from first page Front/Back cover + Facing pages Copies Scan from first page
Copies
Front cover + Facing pages
Copies Front/Back cover + Facing pages
Copies
NOTES:
Memory overflow may occur during scanning. See p. 5-11. When using platen glass, Non-Image Area Erase and AUTO Layout are automatically selected. DO NOT CLOSE the document feeder throughout the scanning job.
10-26
Programming Different Settings for an Output Job
Programming Different Settings for an Output Job (Program Job)

In the ordinary Store mode, the combined features selected for the job are applied to all originals to be scanned. In the Program Job mode, you may scan multiple sets of originals and apply different settings on each set (referred to as JOB), then output them all as a complete set.
Specifications for Program Job

/ Max. 100 JOBs can be programmed for an output job. / Once specified, paper size and the paper type/size setting for Multi-sheet bypass tray cannot be changed for another JOB. / Output mode and print quantity setting cannot be specified for each JOB. The last setting made will be applied to all JOBs. / Program Job settings cannot be stored in Job Memory. / Incompatible Conditions: APS, Change paper size, Group, Rotation Sort, Rotation Group, Fold, Stitch & Fold, Trimming, Mixed Original, Sheet/Cover Insertion, Chapter, Combination, Booklet, Image Insert, Dual Page, MultiPage Enlargement, 2/4/8 Repeat in Repeat, Overlay, Storing Image in Overlay Memory
Original A
Original B
Original C Copied set
1.
10-27

2. Touch Program Job on the Application Selection Screen.
The incompatible function keys will be dimmed to show inactivity.
3.

The Basic Screen will be restored. The STORE key on the Basic Screen appears highlighted to show that the Store mode is automatically selected.
4. 5.
Select the desired copy conditions. Position originals FACE UP in the document feeder or FACE DOWN on the platen glass.
If the number of document feeder originals exceeds 100, divide them into blocks not exceeding 100 sheets and load them from the block with the first page.
6.
Press [START].
The paper size determined at this time will be applied to all subsequent JOBs. When scanning for the current JOB is completed, the popup menu will be displayed in the Basic Screen.
7.
Touch DECISION.
The current JOB images will be stored. To delete the images, touch CANCEL.
10-28

8. Repeat steps 4 to 7 until all JOB originals are scanned.
PLACE AND SCAN EACH ORIGINAL SET IN THE CORRECT ORDER OF PAGINATION.
Memory overflow may occur during scanning. See p. 5-11. Should memory overflow occur frequently, it is recommended that you contact your service representative to expand the memory capacity in your machine.
9.
Select the desired output mode and enter the print quantity from the control panel keypad.
10-29
Dividing an Image for Enlarged Copy (Multi-Page
Dividing an Image for Enlarged Copy (MultiPage Enlargement)

Use this function to make an enlarged copy, made up of several copied pages divided and enlarged from an original image.
Specifications for Multi-Page Enlargement

/ Use the platen glass only. / Use APS, or select the desired paper size on the Basic Screen. If APS is used, the largest paper size will be selected automatically. / The output size can be selected (standard size) or determined when a magnification ratio is entered on the screen. / Incompatible Conditions: Using RADF, 1)2, 2)2, 2)1, APS, AMS, 1:1, Staple, Group, Rotation, Rotation Sort, Rotation Group, Fold, Stitch&Fold, Three-Fold, Trimming, Cover Sheet Feeding, Mixed Original, Z-Folded Original, Non STD Size (except FULL AREA), Sheet/Cover Insertion, Chapter, Combination, Booklet, Image Insert, Dual Page, Program Job, Non-Image Area Erase, Repeat, Frame/Fold Erasure, AUTO Layout, Image Shift, Stamp/ Overlay
Original
Mult-page enlargement
1.
Position original FACE DOWN on the platen glass.

The machine will detect the original size.
10-30

2. Select the desired paper size on the Basic Screen.
Touch the desired tray key to highlight it. If APS is selected (initial setting), the largest paper size loaded in a tray will be selected automatically.
3. 4.
Touch APPLICATION on the Basic Screen. Touch Multi-page Enlargement on the Application Selection Screen.
The Multi-Page Enlargement Setting Screen will be displayed, with the original size and paper size (tray number) indicated.
10-31

5. Select an output size or magnification, as desired.
(1) To select an output size:
Touch STD. SIZE to display the popup menu, touch the desired size key to highlight it, then touch OK. (2) To select a magnification ratio:
Touch ZOOM, enter the desired magnification ratio using the screen keypad or up/down arrow key on the popup menu, then touch OK.
The output size or magnification specified on the popup menu and output quantity to make up a whole image will be displayed on the Multi-Sheet Enlargement Setting Screen.
6.
Touch OK.
10-32

7. 8. Touch OK on the Application Selection Screen.
The actual number of copies will be the product of output quantity multiplied by print quantity.
9.
Press [START].
10-33
Erasing Outside of the Original (Non-Image Area Erase)

The Non-image area erase mode is used to copy non standard or special originals, such as books, magazines, paste-ups, graphs, thick or thin materials, etc. from the platen glass. The exposed glass area outside the borders of the original will not be copied.
Specifications for Non-Image Area Erase

/ Use the platen glass only. Keep RADF open throughout the procedure. / Incompatible Conditions: Using RADF, 2)2, 2)1, APS, AMS, Rotation, Rotation Sort, Rotation Group, Fold/Stitch&Fold/Trimming (with Booklet selected), Mixed Original, Z-Folded Original, Tab Paper, Sheet/Cover Insertion, Chapter, Combination, Booklet, Image Insert, Dual Page in RADF Store mode, Multi-Page Enlargement, Reverse Image, Reduce & Shift in Image Shift, Storing Image in Overlay Memory
General copying
Non-Image Area Erase
Set original
1.

2.
Touch Non-image Area Erase on the Application Selection Screen.
10-34

Select magnification and paper size, as desired.

APS and AMS are automatically released. Copy mode is automatically set to 1)1. If 1)2 is selected, Platen store mode will function automatically.
5.
6.
DO NOT CLOSE THE DOCUMENT FEEDER. Original size should be larger than 10mm x 10mm.
7.
Press [START].
Having Any Problem? This function may perform incorrectly if the lighting in the work place is directly over the platen glass. In this case, consult your service representative about an appropriate place for installation.
10-35
Reversing Colour in Image (Reverse Image)

Use Reverse image to reverse the positive image to the negative image and vice versa in the selected colour mode. Single Colour: Makes a reversed image in the selected single colour. Black: Reverses the image from black-on-white to white-on-black, and vice versa. Full Colour: Copies in complementary colours of the four colours. Auto: Makes a reversed image according to the original image (detected as Full Colour or Black).
Specifications for Reverse Image

/ Incompatible Conditions: Fold, Stitch & Fold, Trimming, Non-Image Area Erase, Repeat, Stamp, Overlay
Original
Reverse Image copying
1.
2.
Touch Reverse Image on the Application Selection Screen.
10-36

Touch a mode key under the COLOUR MODE on the Basic Screen.
Selecting SINGLE COLOUR will display the popup menu to specify a colour.
Touch desired colour key, then touch OK. The selected colour will be indicated under the COLOUR MODE indication of the Basic Screen, with the SINGLE COLOUR key highlighted.
5.
6.
For details on positioning originals, see p. 3-4.
7.
Press [START].
10-37
Repeating Selected Image Area (Repeat: Vert./Horiz. Mode)

Use this function to repeat the selected image area of 10 mm ~ 150 mm in both vertical and horizontal widths measured from the rear left corner of the A3 original area indicated on the left edge of the platen glass.
Vertical/Horizontal Width Setting Mode Specifications

/ Use the platen glass. (Document feeder cannot be used.) / Incompatible Conditions: Using RADF, 2)2, 2)1, APS, AMS, Group, Rotation Sort, Rotation Group, Mixed Original, Z-Folded Original, Sheet/ Cover Insertion, Chapter, Combination, Booklet, Image Insert, Dual Page, Multi-Page Enlargement, Non-Image Area Erase, Reverse Image, Frame/Fold Erasure, AUTO Layout, Reduce&Shift in Image Shift, Stamp/Overlay
Vertical/Horizontal Width Setting mode Horizontal width Vertical width
Repeat copy
1.
2.
Touch Repeat on the Application Selection Screen.
10-38

The Repeat Mode Selection Screen will be displayed.
3.
Touch MANUAL, then specify the vertical and horizontal widths of the scanning area.
Use up/down arrow key to enter the width from 10 to 150 mm in 1 mm increments. Keep touching the key to increase/decrease the value continuously. Or, touch ENTER REPEAT WIDTH USING KEYPAD to display the popup menu to enter the value from the touch screen keypad.
Touch VERTI. WIDTH or HORIZ. WIDTH, enter the value for each, then touch OK to restore the Repeat Mode Selection Screen.
4. 5. 6.
Touch OK.

Select the desired magnification and paper size.

APS and AMS are automatically released, and 1.000 (100%) is selected as a magnification ratio. Copy mode is automatically set to 1)1. If 1)2 is selected, Platen store mode will function automatically.
10-39

8.

See the illustration on p. 10-38 for details.
9.
Press [START].
10-40
Repeating (Repeat: AUTO/Repeat Mode)

Auto Detection mode will automatically set the equal repeat area to the size of the original placed onto the platen glass by activating Non-image area erase. Repeat mode will scan the image area specified by the selected paper size and mode (2 Repeat, 4 Repeat, or 8 Repeat), then arrange the image by specified times in one copy sheet.
Auto Detection/ Repeat Mode Specifications

/ Auto Detection Mode: Use the platen glass. RADF cannot be used. / Repeat Mode Magnification ratio: 1.000 (100%) fixed / Incompatible Conditions with Auto Detection Mode Using RADF, 2)2, 2)1, APS, AMS, Rotation, Group, Rotation Sort, Rotation Group, Mixed Original, Z-Folded Original, Tab Paper, Sheet/Cover Insertion, Chapter, Combination, Booklet, Image Insert, Dual Page, Multi-Page Enlargement, Reverse Image, Frame/Fold Erasure, AUTO Layout, Reduce & Shift in Image Shift, Stamp/Overlay / Incompatible Conditions with Repeat Mode APS, AMS, Rotation (if magnification is changed from 1.000), Group, Rotation Sort, Rotation Group, Mixed Original, Z-Folded Original, Chapter, Combination, Booklet, Image Insert, Dual Page, Multi-Page Enlargement, Non-Image Area Erase, Reverse Image, Frame/Fold Erasure, AUTO Layout, Reduce&Shift in Image Shift, Overlay, Overlay Memory
Auto Detection mode
Copy Repeat mode
Copy (2 Repeat)
Copy (4 Repeat)
Copy (8 Repeat)
10-41

1. Touch APPLICATION on the Basic Screen
2.
Touch Repeat on the Application Selection Screen.
The Repeat Mode Selection Screen will be displayed.
3.
Touch to highlight the desired mode key.
Touch AUTO to select the Auto Detection mode. Touch 2 Repeat, 4 Repeat, or 8 Repeat to select the desired Repeat mode.
4.
Touch OK.
Non-Image Area Erase is automatically selected on the Application Selection Screen when AUTO mode is selected.
When 2 Repeat mode is selected, Page space function of Image Shift can be used to make the desired amount of blank space between the two images on a page. See p. 10-49.
10-42

Select the desired magnification and paper size.

APS and AMS are automatically released, and 1.000 (100%) is selected as a magnification ratio. When 2 Repeat, 4 Repeat, or 8 Repeat is selected, the scanning area will be a portion of the selected paper size equally divided according to the selected mode. In this case, magnification ratio will be fixed to 1.000 (100%). Copy mode is automatically set to 1)1. If 1)2 is selected, Platen store mode will function automatically.
7.
8.
Position original.
For AUTO mode original, open the document feeder, then position the original FACE DOWN on the platen glass. For 2 Repeat, 4 Repeat or 8 Repeat mode original, RADF is also available.
See the illustration on p. 10-41 for details.
When AUTO mode is selected, Non-Image Area Erase functions automatically. DO NOT close the document feeder.
9.
Press [START].
The AUTO mode may not operate properly if the lighting in the work place is directly over the platen glass. In this case, consult your service representative about an appropriate place for installation.
10-43
Eliminating Copy Marks (Frame/Fold Erasure)

Use Frame/Fold Erasure to eliminate black copy marks along borders to clean up and improve the presentation of the copy.
Specifications for Frame/Fold Erasure

/ Incompatible Conditions: Multi-Page Enlargement, Repeat
Frame erasure Frame erasure Fold erasure
Frame erasure Frame erasure
Set original
General copying
Frame Erasure copying
Fold Erasure Frame/Fold Erasure copying copying
1.

2.
Touch Frame/Fold Erasure on the Application Selection Screen.
The Frame/Fold Erasure Selection Screen will be displayed.
10-44

3. Touch to highlight the desired mode key.
Touch Frame Erasure (All sides), Frame Erasure (Each side), or Fold Erasure to highlight it. Either Frame erasure mode and Fold erasure can be selected in combination.
4.
Specify the erasure amount in the selected mode.

(1) To specify Frame Erasure (All sides) amount:
Touch to highlight FRAME, if not highlighted, then use the touch screen keypad or up/down arrow key to enter the desired erasure amount of the TOP, BOTTOM, LEFT, and RIGHT sides collectively, from 1 to 300 mm in 1 mm increments. (2) To specify Frame Erasure (Each side) amount:
Touch to highlight FRAME, if not highlighted, then touch TOP SIDE, RIGHT SIDE, BOTTOM SIDE, or LEFT SIDE. The selected side amount will be highlighted in the left illustration area of the screen.
10-45

Use the touch screen keypad or up/down arrow key to enter the desired erasure amount, from 1 to 300 mm in 1 mm increments. (3) To specify Fold Erasure amount:
Touch to highlight FOLD, if not highlighted, then use the touch screen keypad or up/down arrow key to enter the desired erasure amount, from 1 to 99 mm in 1 mm increments.
5. 6. 7.
Touch OK.

8.
When lowering the document feeder onto thick original (e.g. open book), do not press it down too hard. Keep the document feeder open, if required.
9.
Press [START].
10-46
Copying Image in the Centre of Copy Paper (AUTO Layout)

Use this function to detect the image area of the original and centre the whole image on the copy paper making it easy to copy small pieces of paper.
Specifications for AUTO Layout

/ Non-Image Area Erase is automatically selected. Release it manually when using RADF to scan originals. / Incompatible Conditions: 2)2, 2)1, APS, AMS, Rotation, Rotation Sort, Rotation Group, Mixed Original, Z-Folded Original, Tab Paper, Sheet/Cover Insertion, Chapter*, Combination*, Booklet*, Image Insert, Multi-Page Enlargement, Reverse Image*, Repeat, Image Shift, Overlay, Storing Image in Overlay Memory * Chapter, Combination, Booklet and Reverse Image are available when NonImage Area Erase is released manually.
Auto Layout copying Set original
1.
2.
Touch AUTO Layout on the Application Selection Screen.
10-47
Non-Image Area Erase will be selected automatically. When using RADF to scan the original, touch to deselect this function. If Dual Page is used with this function, the original smaller than the selected paper size will be printed in the centre of the copy paper without image division performed.
3. 4.

Select the desired magnification and paper size on the Basic Screen.
APS and AMS are automatically released, and 1.000 (100%) is selected as a magnification ratio. Copy mode is automatically set to 1)1. If 1)2 is selected, Platen store mode will function automatically.
5.
6.
DO NOT close the RADF when Non-Image Area Erase is selected. Placing original obliquely on the platen glass may cause black copy marks.
7.
Press [START].
Having Any Problem? The AUTO layout function may not operate properly if the lighting in the work place is directly over the platen glass. In this case, consult your service representative about an appropriate place for installation.
10-48
Adjusting Position of Copy Image (Image Shift)

Use Image Shift to adjust the position of copy images, e.g. for the purpose of creating a new binding margin on originals to make it easier for filing purposes. Page Space function is available only when Booklet or 2 Repeat mode of Repeat has been already selected. Use this function to make the desired amount of blank space between the two images on a page. See the illustration on p. 10-49 for details. If image loss is likely, select the Reduce & Shift mode instead of regular Image shift. See p. 10-52.
Specifications for Image Shift

/ Shift amount: 0 to 250 mm in 1 mm increments Setting in 0.1 mm increments using up/down arrow key is also available by Key Operator setting. See p. 14-38. / Incompatible Conditions: Multi-Page Enlargement, AUTO Layout, Storing images in Overlay Memory
Right Up
Down Left Up Original Down Left Copies Right
1. 2.
Select the copy mode and paper size from the Basic Screen, as required. Touch APPLICATION on the Basic Screen.
10-49

3. Touch Image Shift on the Application Selection Screen.
4.
Touch SHIFT on the Image Shift Setting Screen, then specify the shift direction and amount.
Touch FRONT or BACK to specify the shift direction and amount individually; or touch BOTH SIDES to specify collectively. The BACK and BOTH SIDES keys function only for duplex copying. Touch to highlight the desired shift direction key, then use the touch screen keypad or up/down arrow key to enter the desired shift amount, from 0 to 250 mm in 1 mm increments. The image display on the screen allows you to view the shift direction and amount to be created on the printed sheets. When Booklet or 2 Repeat mode of Repeat has been already selected, the PAGE SPACE key appears clear on the screen to show its availability.
10-50

If desired, touch PAGE SPACE to highlight it, then enter the desired amount using the touch screen keypad or up/down arrow key.
5. 6. 7.
Touch OK.

8.
9.
Press [START].
Page Space Function

Booklet Page space
Original
Page space 2 Repeat in Repeat
Page space
10-51
Reducing Images to Create Binding Margin (Reduce&Shift)

Use Reduce & Shift instead of regular Image Shift to prevent image loss when creating a binding margin.
Specifications for Reduce & Shift

/ AMS is automatically selected and cannot be released. / Shift amount: 0 to 250 mm in 1 mm increments Setting in 0.1 mm increments using up/down arrow key is also available by Key Operator setting. See p. 14-38. / Incompatible Conditions: Change magnification, V/H zoom, APS, Mixed Original, Dual Page, Multi-Page Enlargement, Non-Image Area Erase, Repeat, AUTO Layout, Overlay, Storing Image in Overlay Memory
Left binding margin Left Right Up
Down Originals Front Front Back
Right binding margin Right Left Up
Down Front Back Left Back Right
Top binding margin Left Right
Down Front Back Up
10-52

1. 2. Select the copy mode and paper size, as required. Touch APPLICATION on the Basic Screen.
3.
Touch Image Shift on the Application Selection Screen.
4.
Touch REDUCE&SHIFT on the Image Shift Setting Screen, then specify the shift direction and amount.
Touch FRONT or BACK. In Reduce & Shift mode, the BOTH SIDES key appears dimmed to show inactivity. Touch to highlight the desired shift direction key, then use the touch screen keypad or up/down arrow key to enter the desired shift amount, from 0 to 250 mm in 1 mm increments. The image display on the screen allows you to view the shift direction and amount to be printed on the printed sheets.
The AMS will automatically determine the magnification ratio according to the shift amount specified for the front page. The shift amount and magnification ratio determined for the front page will be automatically applied to the back page. If any positioning adjustment is required, touch BACK and make direction and amount change.
10-53

5. 6. 7. Touch OK.

8.
9.
Press [START].
10-54
Printing Stamp, Page, Date/Time onto Copies (Stamp)

This function allows you to print onto output copies the desired type of stamp, page number, numbering, and date/time at the location designated on the screen. The four stamp types and watermark (described in the next subsection) provided on the Stamp/Overlay Selection Screen can be used individually or in multiple combinations.
Specification for STAMP, SET NUMBERING, PAGE NUMBERING, DATE/TIME

/ To use the STAMP function, the optional HDD (HD-106) is required to be installed in the machine. / Incompatible Conditions: Multi-Page Enlargement, Reverse Image, Repeat except 2/4/8 Repeat, Overlay (with STAMP and SET NUMBERING), Overlay Memory
Top-Left STAMP
T-Middle
T-Right
SET NUMBERING Middle-Left PAGE NUMBERING Middle M-Right
DATE/TIME
Lower-Left
L-Middle
L-Right
Printing positions
1.
10-55

2. Touch Stamp/Overlay on the Application Selection Screen.
The Stamp/Overlay Selection Screen will be displayed.
3.
Touch to select the desired key in the STAMP area.
The subsequent screen will be displayed to allow you to specify the selected stamp type.
4.
When selecting STAMP: Specify the stamp type, printing position, character size and printed page.
Touch to highlight the desired stamp key and printing position key on the screen. If fine adjustment is required, touch FINE ADJ. OF POSITION to display the Fine Adjustment Setting Screen. See p. 10-55 for details. Touch CHANGE OF THE CHARACTER SIZE to select LARGER or SMALLER. Touch CHANGE OF THE PRINTED PAGE to designate whether to print the selected stamp on the cover only or on all pages.
10-56

When selecting SET NUMBERING: Specify the numbering type, printing position, character size, printed page and starting No.
Touch to highlight the desired numbering type key and printing position key on the screen. If fine adjustment is required, touch FINE ADJ. OF POSITION to display the Fine Adjustment Setting Screen. See p. 10-55 for details. Touch CHANGE OF THE CHARACTER SIZE to select 20 pt or 36 pt. Touch CHANGE OF THE PRINTED PAGE to designate whether to print the selected stamp on the cover only or on all pages. Touch STARTING No. to designate the starting number, if required. See p. 1055 for details.
When selecting PAGE NUMBERING: Specify the page numbering type, printing position, character size, printed page and starting No.
Touch to highlight the desired page numbering type key and printing position key on the screen. If fine adjustment is required, touch FINE ADJ. OF POSITION to display the Fine Adjustment Setting Screen. See p. 10-55 for details. Touch CHANGE OF THE CHARACTER to select the character size (8 pt, 10 pt, 12 pt or 14 pt) and type (GOTHIC or MING). See p. 10-55 for details. Touch CHANGE OF THE PRINTED PAGE to designate whether to print the selected stamp on the front/back cover or insertions. See p. 10-55 for details. Touch STARTING No. to designate the starting number, if required. See p. 1055 for details.
10-57

When selecting DATE/TIME: Specify the date/time type, printing position, character size and printed page.
Touch to highlight the desired date, time, and printing position keys on the screen. If fine adjustment is required, touch FINE ADJ. OF POSITION to display the Fine Adjustment Setting Screen. See p. 10-55 for details. Touch CHANGE OF THE CHARACTER to select the character size (8 pt, 10 pt, 12 pt or 14 pt) and type (GOTHIC or MING). See p. 10-55 for details. Touch CHANGE OF THE PRINTED PAGE to designate whether to print the selected stamp on the cover only or on all pages.
5.
Touch OK.
The Stamp/Overlay Selection Screen will be restored. Touch to select another stamp function key to use in combination, if desired.
6.
Select the stamp colour.
Touch STAMP COLOUR SELECT to display the Stamp Colour Selection Screen. Touch the desired stamp type key to highlight it, then select the stamp colour from the right side portion of the screen. Touch OK to return to the Stamp/Overlay Selection Screen.
7. 8.
Touch OK on the Stamp/Overlay Selection Screen.


10-58

10. Position original(s) FACE UP in the document feeder or FACE DOWN on the platen glass.
11. Press [START].

Fine Adjustment Setting Screen When FINE ADJ. OF POSITION is touched, the Fine Adjustment Setting Screen will be displayed.
Touch TOP SIDE, BOTTOM SIDE, RIGHT SIDE, or LEFT SIDE to specify the direction, then use the touch screen keypad or up/down arrow key to enter the desired amount, from 0 to 50 mm. Touch OK to return to the previous screen. Starting No. Setting Screen: Available from SET NUMBERING or WATERMARK NUMBERING
Use the touch screen keypad or up/down arrow key to enter the desired starting number, then touch OK to return to the previous screen.
10-59

Starting No. Setting Screen: Available from PAGE NUMBERING When Chapter is already selected, the chapter starting number can also be specified on the Starting No. Setting Screen.
Touch PAGE NUMBER or CHAPTER NUMBER to highlight it, then use the touch screen keypad or up/down arrow key to enter the desired starting number for each. Use + <> to enter a minus number to print from halfway through, e.g. 2 to Originals print 1 from page 4. Touch OK to return to the previous screen. Copies When 2 is entered Copies
When(+)2 is entered
Character Size/Type Selection Screen: from PAGE NUMBERING or DATE/TIME When CHANGE OF THE CHARACTER is touched, the Character Size/Type Selection Screen will be displayed.
Touch to select the desired key, then touch OK to return to the previous screen.
10-60

Cover/Insert Print Setting Selection Screen: from PAGE NUMBERING When copied/blank insertion mode of Sheet/Cover Insertion has been already selected, this screen allows you to specify whether to print the page number on insertions, or skip them from the page count.
Touch to select the desired key, then touch OK to return to the Page Numbering Type Selection Screen.
10-61
Printing Watermark onto Copies (Stamp)

Use this function to print the desired letter type obliquely in the centre of the page (WATERMARK), or the numbers in the specified form repeatedly over the scanned image (WATERMARK NUMBERING).
Specification for WATERMARK and WATERMARK NUMBERING

/ To use WATERMARK, the optional HDD (HD-106) is required to be installed in the machine. / Incompatible Conditions: Rotation Group, Rotation Sort, Multi-Page Enlargement, Reverse Image, Repeat except 2/4/8 Repeat, Overlay, Overlay Memory
WATERMARK
WATERMARK NUMBERING
1.
10-62

2. Touch Stamp/Overlay on the Application Selection Screen.
3.
Touch WATERMARK or WATERMARK NUMBERING, as desired.
The subsequent screen will be displayed to allow you to specify the selected watermark type.
4.
When selecting WATERMARK: Specify the desired watermark type, density, and colour.
Touch to highlight the desired watermark key. If fine adjustment of the centred watermark position is required, touch FINE ADJ. OF POSITION to display the Fine Adjustment Setting Screen. See p. 1055 for details.
10-63

To select the density and colour of the watermark, touch DENSITY or COLOUR to display the popup menu, touch the desired density/colour key to highlight it, then touch OK.
When selecting WATERMARK NUMBERING: Specify the desired watermark numbering type, density, colour, character size and starting No.
Touch to highlight the desired watermark key. Touch CHANGE OF THE CHARACTER SIZE to select 20 pt or 36 pt. Touch STARTING No. to designate the starting number, if required. See p. 1055 for details.
10-64

To select the density and colour of the watermark numbering, touch DENSITY or COLOUR to display the popup menu, touch the desired density/colour key to highlight it, then touch OK.
5.
Touch OK.
The Stamp/Overlay Selection Screen will be restored. Touch to select another stamp function key to use in combination, if desired.
6. 7. 8.


9.
10. Press [START].
10-65
10-66
Overlaying an Image onto Each Page Copied in the Job
Overlaying an Image onto Each Page Copied in the Job (Overlay)

Use this function to scan an image, then overlay the image onto each page copied in the job.
Specification for Overlay

/ Store mode is automatically selected. / Incompatible Conditions: ACS, Rotation, Rotation Sort, Rotation Group, Mixed Original, Sheet/Cover Insertion, Combination, Image Insert, Dual page, Program Job, Multi-Page Enlargement, Reverse Image, Repeat, AUTO Layout, Reduce & Shift in Image Shift, STAMP, SET NUMBERING, WATERMARK, WATERMARK NUMBERING
Originals scanned 2nd and later Copies in Overlay mode
1st scanned original
1.
2.
Touch Stamp/Overlay on the Application Selection Screen.
10-67

3. Touch OVERLAY.
4. 5.


The Basic Screen will be restored. The Store mode is automatically selected.
6.
Select the desired paper size and magnification on the Basic Screen.
APS and AMS are automatically released, and 1.000 (100%) is selected as a magnification ratio.
7.
8.
Position the overlaying original.

Position the original FACE UP in the document feeder or FACE DOWN on the platen glass.
9.

The original image will be scanned into memory.
10. Position the original(s) to be overlaid.

11. Press [START] to scan. 12. Repeat steps 10 and 11 for all originals. 13. Touch STORE to exit the Store mode, then press [START] to print.
10-68
10-69
Storing Overlay Image in HDD (Overlay Memory)

Use Overlay Memory to scan and store several images in HDD, then recall the desired image from the HDD to overlay onto each page copied in the job.
Specification for Overlay Memory

/ To use this function, the optional HDD (HD-106) is required to be installed in the machine. / Incompatible Conditions with Image Store: Using RADF, ACS, 1)2, 2)2, 2)1, AMS, Reserve Mode, Interrupt Mode, Selecting Output Mode, Mixed Original, Z-Folded Original, Tab Paper, Sheet/Cover Insertion, Chapter, Combination, Booklet, Image Insert, Dual Page, Program Job, Multi-Page Enlargement, Non-Image Area Erase, Reverse Image, Repeat, AUTO Layout, Image Shift, Stamp, Overlay / Incompatible Conditions with Output: Rotation Group, Rotation Sort, Face Up, Multi-Page Enlargement, Reverse Image, Repeat (except 2/4/8 Repeat), STAMP, SET NUMBERING, WATERMARK, WATERMARK NUMBERING in Stamp, Overlay
Image Store
HDD Store in HDD Overlaying Image Recall overlaying image Output
Output
Recalled image
Overlay originals
Copies in Overlay Memory mode
10-70

1. Touch APPLICATION on the Basic Screen.
2.
Touch Stamp/Overlay on the Application Selection Screen.
3.
Touch OVERLAY MEMORY.
The Overlaying Image Selection Screen will be displayed. Proceed to step 9, when recalling only the stored image.
10-71

4. Touch IMAGE STORE to display the Image Name Entry Screen.
5.
Enter the desired image name.
Use the touch screen keypad to enter the desired name up to 8 characters. The date when you made this entry will be stored automatically. To correct an entry, touch 1-CHARACTER DELETE repeatedly to delete each character, then enter the correct name.
6.
If the image name is correct, touch OK.

The Basic Screen to store the overlaying image will be displayed. Select the desired copy conditions.
The popup menu may be displayed to prompt you that the entered image name has been already used. See p. 10-70 for details.
7.
Position the overlaying original on the platen glass.

The document feeder cannot be used for storing the overlaying image.
10-72

8. Press [START] to scan.
The Overlaying Image Data Storing Screen will be displayed.
To stop scanning, press [STOP].
The machine automatically starts to store the overlaying image data in the HDD. The Overlaying Image Selection Screen will resume when the storing function is completed. To continue to store the overlaying image data, return to step 4.
9.
Touch to select the desired overlaying image data, then touch OK.
The Stamp/Overlay Selection Screen will be restored.

Image Delete Key on the Overlay Image Selection Screen If the IMAGE DELETE key is displayed on the Overlay Image Selection Screen, you can delete the stored image and name. Select the image name using up/down arrow key to scroll, then touch IMAGE DELETE.
10. Touch OK to return to the Application Selection Screen. 11. Touch OK to return to the Basic Screen.
The Store mode is automatically selected, and APS and AMS are released. Set the desired conditions on the Basic Screen.
10-73

13. Position the original(s) to be overlaid.

14. Press [START] to scan. 15. Repeat steps 13 and 14 for all originals. 16. Touch STORE to exit the Store mode, then press [START] to print.
Popup Menu for Name Duplication If the popup menu with YES and NO keys is displayed instead of the Basic Screen, the entered name is duplicated. Touch YES to enter a new name, or NO to create a duplicate name.
If the popup menu with OK key is displayed, the entered name is duplicated. Touch OK, then enter a new name.
Changing the popup menu for duplicate name and displaying the IMAGE DELETE key is available in the Memory switch No. 38 of the Key Operator setting. See p. 14-38.
10-74
11
Network Function
How to Use Web Utilities
To Use Web Utilities ...........................................................................11-2 To Display Information on Machine....................................................11-4 To Display Current Machine Status (Job Status) ...............................11-6 Setting E-Mail Transmission Function ...............................................11-8 Setting E.K.C. Function....................................................................11-10 Setting Scan Transmission Function................................................11-21 Transmitting/Editing Machine Setting File .......................................11-25
To Use Web Utilities

When the machine is connected to a PC over a network, a web browser on the PC provides the following functions. 1 Main Page Displays the job in progress, service call, and machine information. 2 Job Status Displays the current and previous job status. 3 Environment Setup Makes the Key Operator setting concerning network environment and E.K.C. function. Browser: Internet Explorer 5.5 SP2 / Netscape Navigator 4.7 or later Follow the procedure below to access the Web Utilities of the machine using the web browser.
1.
Turn on the power to the PC connected with the machine over a network.
Contact your network manager for details on the network system.
2.
Activate the web browser, then select [Open] from the File menu.
11-2

3. Enter the URL (http:// [IP address or host name of the machine]), then click on [OK].
Ask your network manager for the IP address or host name of the machine.
The Main Page of the Web Utilities will be displayed.
The Main Page informs you of the current job status of the machine and the maintenance item, if required. Service call JAM Paper supply Toner supply Staple cartridge supply Complete Job Non Complete Job Finisher tray full Dispose of Trimmer waste basket Dispose ot Punch waste basket PM call
Click on [REFRESH] in the Web Utilities window to update the information. The Web Utilities window is subject to change without notice.
11-3
To Display Information on Machine

Follow the procedure below to display the machine information using the web browser.
1. 2.
Open the Web Utilities window. Click on the bizhub PRO C500 image.
The window now provides the paper tray configuration, engine configuration, option information and ROM version information.
11-4
The same information will be provided also in the Job Status window. See p. 11-6.
Click on [REFRESH] in the window to update the information.
11-5
To Display Current Machine Status (Job Status)

Follow the procedure below to display the current job status, job list including reserved jobs and job information, and information on up to 16 previous jobs.
1. 2.
Open the Web Utilities window. Click on [Job Status].
The current job status, number of jobs in waiting, and remaining time before the print job is completed.
Clicking on the bizhub PRO C500 image will display the machine information. See p. 11-4.
Click on [REFRESH] to update the information.
11-6

3. Display the current job or reserved job information.
Click on the desired [Job Priority No.] under the Job List. The information on the specified job will appear in the second Job List area.
If no print job or reserved job exists, Job Empty will be displayed in the first Job List area.
4.
Display the previous job information.

Click on the desired [Job ID No.] under the Job Status. The information on the specified previous job will appear in the second Job Status area.
If no job has been printed after the machine has been powered on, Jobs dont exist will be displayed in the first Job Status area.
11-7
Setting E-Mail Transmission Function

Make the Key Operator setting concerning the network environment using the web browser. For details of the E-Mail Transmission Setting, refer to p. 14-9.
1. 2. 3.
Open the Web Utilities window. Click on [Environment Setup]. Display the E-Mail Transmission Setting window.
Enter the 4-digit Key Operator password, then click on [Apply].
Click on [E-Mail transmission setting].
The E-Mail Transmission Setting window will be displayed.

The Extension for maintenance option will be exclusively used by your service representative.
11-8

4. Make the setting.
Enter the IP address of the mail server, IP address of the DNS server (if needed), time difference, and E-mail address to be informed of the machine status. Click on the check box of the desired transmission item.
Click on [Apply] to complete the setting and return to the Web Utilities window. Clicking on [Reset] will void the setting and restore the Web Utilities window. Clicking on [Sending test] will send a test mail to the manager.
11-9
Setting E.K.C. Function

Make the following Key Operator settings concerning the E.K.C. function using the web browser on a PC. E.K.C. Data Add (see step 4.) Add a new E.K.C. data (password, name, and copy limit) to the E.K.C. list. E.K.C. Data List (see step 5.) Change or delete the E.K.C. data (password, name, or copy limit) in the list, or reset the counters. E.K.C. Function Setting (see step 6.) Specify the following E.K.C. function settings. Switching the E.K.C.: ON/OFF Effect when the copy limit is reached: Immediately / After job / Warning E.K.C. password: 8 digits / under 8 digits E.K.C. password input timing: Auto reset timer/ Complete job Wrong E.K.C. password (from printer): Accept / Reject
The above settings can also be made on the machine itself, except for the Wrong E.K.C. password (from printer) setting. Some settings may require operations on the machine. Refer to pages 14-12 and 14-37.
1. 2. 3.
Open the Web Utilities window. Click on [Environment Setup]. Display the E.K.C. Function Setting window.
The Environment Setup menu window will be displayed. Click on [E.K.C. function setting].
11-10
The Enter Network Password dialog box will be displayed. Enter ekc in the User Name text box, and an 8-digit master key code in the Password text box, then click on [OK].
The E.K.C. Function Setting menu window will be displayed.
4.
Add an E.K.C. data.

Click on [E.K.C. data add] in the E.K.C. Function Setting menu window.
11-11

The E.K.C. Data Setting window will be displayed.
Enter the following items to register a new E.K.C. data, then click on [Registration]. Number: Automatically assigned Password: 8 digits max. Name: 8 characters max. Limit: 999,999 copies max.
To clear the text boxes, click on [Reset]. To cancel adding a new E.K.C. data, click on any E.K.C. Function Setting menu item to jump to the desired window.
Error Message A duplicate password or name will be rejected with an error message. However, duplicating a password is possible using the Key Operator setting. Refer to p. 14-15. The Name entry box accepts letters (capital letters only), numbers, and four symbols: (, ), -, and /. Any other symbols will be rejected with an error message displayed in the window. Max. 1,000 E.K.C. entries can be registered. An error message will be displayed if the above limit is exceeded. An error message may be displayed when the data entry has not been completed due to the machine operation in progress. Please click on [Registration] while the machine is in an idle state.
The registered content will be displayed in the window. The new E.K.C. data will be transmitted to the machine immediately so that is valid for the user operations.
11-12
Click on any menu item to jump to the desired window.
5.
Edit the E.K.C. data.

Click on [E.K.C. data list] in the E.K.C. Function Setting menu window (see p. 11-10) or from the menu in any subsequent window. The E.K.C. Data List window will be displayed.
The Another user count in the list indicates the count accumulated for the jobs performed by non-registered users. This data cannot be edited other than resetting the counter.
11-13

To change Password, Name, or Limit: (1) Click on the number of the data to be edited.
The E.K.C. Edit Setting window will be displayed.
(2) (3)
Change the password, name, or limit, as desired. For details in entering procedure, refer to p. 11-10. Click on [Registration].
To clear the text boxes, click on [Reset]. To cancel editing the E.K.C. data, click on any E.K.C. Function Setting menu item to jump to the desired window.
11-14
Error Message See Details on p. 11-10 if an error message is displayed after clicking on [Registration].
The edited content will be displayed in the window. The edited data will be transmitted to the machine immediately so that is valid for the user operations.
Click on any E.K.C. Function Setting menu item to jump to the desired window. To reset E.K.C. count: (1) Click on the check box(es) to select the E.K.C. data of the counter to be cleared. If all the counters are to be cleared, click on [SelectAll]. (2) Click on the radio button (a white circle) heading the Count reset selected item(s). (3) Click on [Apply]
.
11-15

The Count Reset Confirmation window will be displayed.
To cancel resetting the E.K.C. data, click on any E.K.C. Function Setting menu item to jump to the desired window.
(4)
Click on [Apply] to immediately reset the counters to zero. The message Setting was changed will be displayed.
Error Message If an error message is displayed after clicking on [Apply], a counter has not been reset due to a machine operation in progress. The machine must be in an idle state when you click on [Apply].
Click on [Back] to return to the E.K.C. Data List window. To delete E.K.C. data: (1) Click on the check box(es) to select the E.K.C. data to be deleted. If all the data are to be cleared, click on [SelectAll]. (2) Click on the radio button (a white circle) heading the Delete selected item(s) (Except for Another user count). (3) Click on [Apply].
11-16
The Delete Confirmation window will be displayed.

To cancel deleting the E.K.C. data, click on any E.K.C. Function Setting menu item to jump to the desired window.
(4)
Click on [Apply] to immediately delete the data. The message Setting was deleted will be displayed.
11-17
Error Message If an error message is displayed after clicking on [Apply], data has not been deleted due to a machine operation in progress. The machine must be in an idle state when you click on [Apply].
Click on [Back] to return to the E.K.C. Data List window or any menu item to jump to the desired window. To save E.K.C. data list as a file: (1) Click on [Save this table as a file].
(2)
Click on [Save] in the File Download dialog box.
11-18
(3)
.
In the dialog box, designate the folder for saving the data, then click on [Save]
The E.K.C. data will be stored in CSV format. The data cannot be saved while the machine is in operation. In this case,try this procedure again after the machine starts idling. Click on [Back] in the browser window to return to the E.K.C. Data Kust window for starting over. ex. E.K.C. data list stored as a file
The "Another user count" will be stored by the name of "UNKNOWN" in the last line.
11-19

6. Set the E.K.C. function.
Click on [E.K.C. function setting] in the E.K.C. Function Setting menu window (see p. 11-10) or from the menu in any subsequent window. The E.K.C. Function Setting window will be displayed. Click on the radio button (white circle) of the desired selection item(s) so that a black dot appears in it.
Click on [Apply]. The change made in the settings will be transmitted immediately for the user operations.
To restore the previous setting, click on [Reset]. To cancel the E.K.C. function setting, click on any E.K.C. Function Setting menu item.
Error Message If an error message is displayed after clicking on [Apply], a setting has not been completed due to a machine operation in progress. The machine must be in an idle state when you click on [Apply].
Click on [Back] to return to the E.K.C. Function Setting menu window or any menu item to jump to the desired window.
11-20
Setting Scan Transmission Function

Make the Key Operator setting concerning the transmission of the scanned image data using the web browser. For details of the Scan Transmission Setting, contact your service representative.
Specifications for Scan Transmission Setting

/ The Scan Transmission Setting is available only when the IP-901 Printer Controller is installed in the machine.
1. 2. 3.
Open the Web Utilities window. Click on [Environment Setup]. Display the Scan Transmission Setting window.
The Environment Setup menu window will be displayed. Click on [Scan transmission setting].
The Scan Transmission Setting window will be displayed.

The [Scan transmission setting] key appears in the window only when the optional Printer Controller is connected to the machine.
11-21

4. Register the E-Mail, HDD, and FTP, as required.
For details of this setting, refer to the instruction manual of the printer controller.
The symbols that cannot be displayed in the entry box will be ignored, if entered. The HDD Box No. will be registered as a 4-digit number. For example, entering [1] will be registered as [0001].
Click on [Registration] to complete the entry. The registered content will be displayed.
11-22

Click on [Back] to return to the Scan Transmission Setting window.
5.
Display the Entry List.

Click on [Entry List] of the desired item under the entry box to display the Entry List.
Click on [Back] to return to the Scan Transmission Setting window.
6.
Change the registered contents.

Display the Entry List of the desired item as described in step 5. Click on the entry name to be changed. The window for changing the selected item will be displayed.
Change the contents as desired, then click on [Registration]. The registered content will be displayed.
Click on [Back] to return to the Entry List window.
11-23

7. Delete the registered contents.
Display the Entry List of the desired item as described in step 5. Click on the check box in the Delete column of the item to be deleted, then click on [Delete]. If all the items are to be deleted, click on [SelectAll], then click on [Delete]. The window for deleting the selected item will be displayed.
Click on the check box again to release the selection.
Confirm the registered name to be deleted, then click on [Yes]. Click on [Back] on the web browser to return to the Entry List window.
11-24
Transmitting/Editing Machine Setting File

Follow the procedure below to transmit the following setting file from the machine to a PC (export) using the web browser, edit the setting data on the PC, then return the file to the machine (import). E.K.C. data (max. 1,000 files) Three Scan Transmission Setting data E-mail data (max. 450 files) HDD (Box No.) (max. 150 files) FTP (FTP server address) (max. 30 files) Tray Offset Adjustment data (max. 64 files)
The machine setting file can be stored in a PC so that it may be returned to the machine at any time, and is available for common use if you have two or more machines. The file transmitted to a PC, being converted to a file type for batch processing, can be edited efficiently and returned to the machine. The file transmitted to a PC normally contains the five data types mentioned above, however, each data type can be made into a file and transmitted separately. For details of E.K.C. data, see p. 14-15. For details of Scan Transmission Setting data, see p. 14-50.
1. 2. 3.
Open the Web Utilities window. Click on [Environment Setup]. Display the Setting File Import/Export window.
The Environment Setup menu window will be displayed. Click on [Setting data Import/Export].
11-25
The Enter Network Password dialog box will be displayed. Enter ekc in the User Name text box, and an 8-digit master key code in the Password text box, then click on [OK].
The Setting File Import/Export window will be displayed.
4.
Export the machine setting file.

Select the desired file type from the pull-down menu, then click on [Export].
The data format cannot be changed from TAB separated.
11-26

Confirm that the radio button heading Save this file to disk is marked in the File Download dialog box, then click on [OK].
In the dialog box, designate the folder for saving the machine setting file, then click on [Save].
The file name is automatically assigned as described below. Select the data to be exported, changing the name if desired. ekc_tab.txt (E.K.C. data) ip_email.txt (E-mail data of Scan Transmission Setting data) ip_hdd.txt (HDD data of Scan Transmission Setting data) ip_ftp.txt (FTP data of Scan Transmission Setting data) tray_offset.txt (Tray Offset Adjustment data)
Error Message The file cannot be accessed when the machine is operating. If an error message is displayed, try again to save the file after the current machine operation is completed.
A dialog box will be displayed when the saving operation is completed.
11-27

Click on [Close].
5.
Edit the machine setting file.

The machine setting file transmitted to a PC is a TAB separated text file which can be edited using an application software such as Text Editor or Table Editor. A new setting file can also be created according to the specifications for each file type. See p. 11-25 for details.
6.
Import the machine setting file.

Click on [Browse] to designate the machine setting file to be imported, then click on [Import].
The result message will be displayed when the registration is completed.
Error Message If the registration cannot be completed successfully, error messages will be displayed as follows. Cant transfer data (The machine is busy) Try again to import the data after the machine operation in progress is completed. The data cannot be recognized Confirm that the data is the machine setting file. Data size is too large Confirm that the data is the machine setting file. Check if the file size exceeds 100,000 bytes.
11-28

The data cannot be registered Check if inappropriate description is made in the machine setting file. See p. 11-25 for details. Check if the file entries are already over the limit.
To Edit the Machine Setting File Save the file as a text. Begin the file with a specified tag. (ex. #EKC_TAB) A line should be 300 bytes or less. The file size should be 100,000 bytes or less. The line that begins with # is a comment.
ex. Machine setting file of an E.K.C. data
Specifications for Each Machine Setting File Type E.K.C. data setting file: Begin the file with #EKC_TAB. Max. 1,000 files can be edited. A line should include PASSWORD, NAME, COPY COLOUR LIMIT, COPY MONO LIMIT, PRINT COLOUR LIMIT, PRINT MONO LIMIT, LIMIT TARGET, COLOUR PERMISSION, and MONO PERMISSION, separated by a tab. Use up to 8 digits numbers (0 - 9) only to specify PASSWORD. Use numbers, alphabets (capital letters only), and four symbols: (, ), -, and / only to specify NAME. Use up to 6 digits numbers (0 - 9) only to specify LIMIT (0 - 999,999). Specify 0 for Common set, or 1 for Separate set in LIMIT TARGET. Specify 0 for permission, or 1 for prohibition in COLOUR PERMISSION and MONO PERMISSION. E-mail data setting file: Begin the file with #IP_EMAIL. Max. 450 files can be edited. A line should include ENTRY NAME and E-MAIL ADDRESS, being separated by a tab. ENTRY NAME should be 18 bytes or less. E-MAIL ADDRESS should be 64 bytes or less.
11-29

HDD data setting file: Begin the file name with #IP_HDD. Max. 150 files can be edited. A line should include ENTRY NAME and BOX NUMBER, being separated by a tab. ENTRY NAME should be 18 bytes or less. Use up to 4 digits numbers (0 - 9) only to specify a BOX NUMBER. FTP data setting file: Begin the file name with #IP_FTP. Max. 30 files can be edited. A line should include PROFILE NAME, HOST ADDRESS, FILE PATH, LOGIN, PORT No. and FIREWALL, being separated by a tab. PROFILE NAME should be 18 bytes or less. HOST ADDRESS should be 63 bytes or less. FILE PATH should be 127 bytes or less. LOGIN should be 47 bytes or less. PASSWORD should be 31 bytes or less. PORT No. should be 0 to 65535. FIREWALL should be 0 or 1. Tray Offset Adjustment data setting file: Begin the file name with #TRAY_OFFSET. Max. 64 files can be edited. A line should include NUMBER, NAME, RESTART TIMING (SIDE 1), REGISTRATION LOOP (SIDE 1), CENTRING (SIDE 1), VERTICAL MAGNIFICATION (SIDE 1), HORIZONTAL MAGNIFICATION (SIDE 1), RESTART TIMING (SIDE 2), REGISTRATION LOOP (SIDE 2), CENTRING (SIDE 2), VERTICAL MAGNIFICATION (SIDE 2) and HORIZONTAL MAGNIFICATION (SIDE 2), being separated by a tab. NUMBER should be 1 to 64. NAME should be 18 bytes or less. RESTART TIMING (SIDE 1 / SIDE 2) should be -100 to +100. REGISTRATION LOOP (SIDE 1 / SIDE 2) should be -99 to +99. CENTRING (SIDE 1 / SIDE 2) should be -30 to +30. VERTICAL MAGNIFICATION (SIDE 1 / SIDE 2) should be -100 to +100. HORIZONTAL MAGNIFICATION (SIDE 1 / SIDE 2) should be -100 to +100.
11-30
12
Paper and Original Information
Paper Information ..............................................................................12-2 Original Information..........................................................................12-10
Paper Information
Paper Information
This machine is equipped with the following trays for loading copy paper. Tray 1, 2 and 3 (Main body tray) LCT (LT-211 Large Capacity Tray) Multi-sheet bypass tray
Also, the following equipment is provided for conveying/delivering copies. - ADU (Automatic Duplex Unit) - Finisher (FS-513/FS-606) - Cover Sheet Feeder (PI-110) - Punching Kit (PK-507/PK-508) - Trimmer Unit (TU-109) - Exit tray (for the machine without Finisher) Refer to the following information on paper capacity for each.
12-2
Paper Information
Paper Weight
Paper Trays Tray 1, 2, and 3 (Main body tray) Weight 64g/m2 ~ 209g/m2 The tray number for paper weight is specified in the Key Operator mode. 1: 64g/m2 ~ 74g/m2 2: 75g/m2 ~ 80g/m2 3: 81g/m2 ~ 105g/m2 4: 106g/m2 ~ 162g/m2 5: 163g/m2 ~ 209g/m2 64g/m2 ~ 256g/m2 The tray number for paper weight is specified in the Key Operator mode. 1: 64g/m2 ~ 74g/m2 2: 75g/m2 ~ 80g/m2 3: 81g/m2 ~ 105g/m2 4: 106g/m2 ~ 162g/m2 5: 163g/m2 ~ 209g/m2 6: 210g/m2 ~ 256g/m2 64g/m2 ~ 256g/m2 The tray number for paper weight can be selected on the Type/Size popup menu of Basic Screen, and the popup menu is specifed in the Key Operator mode. 1: 64g/m2 ~ 74g/m2 2: 75g/m2 ~ 80g/m2 3: 81g/m2 ~ 105g/m2 4: 106g/m2 ~ 162g/m2 5: 163g/m2 ~ 209g/m2 6: 210g/m2 ~ 256g/m2 Weight 64 g/m2 ~ 209 g/m2 50 g/m2 ~ 256 g/m2 60 g/m2 ~ 105 g/m2 for Staple-sort / Stitch&Fold mode 60 g/m2 ~ 105 g/m2 for Three-Fold mode 50 g/m2 ~ 200 g/m2 50 g/m2 ~ 128 g/m2 for Manual punching 60 g/m2 ~ 105 g/m2 for Manual three fold 50 g/m2 ~ 128 g/m2 64 g/m2 ~ 105 g/m2 50 g/m2 ~ 256 g/m2
LCT
Multi-sheet bypass tray
Paper Trays ADU Finisher
Cover sheet feeder
Punching kit Trimmer unit Exit tray
Some paper types may not be punched easily.
12-3
Paper Information
See p. 14-22 for Paper Type setting of Tray 1, 2, 3 or LCT. See p. 3-20 for Paper Type setting of Multi-sheet bypass tray. When paper type of 106 g/m2 to 256 g/m2 is specified, copy speed may become one-second to one-third lower. For more detailed information, contact your service representative.
12-4
Paper Information
Tray / Exit Tray Capacity
Paper Trays Tray 1, 2, and 3 (Main body tray) LCT (LT-211) Multi-sheet bypass tray Capacity 500 sheets (90 g/m2 paper) 2,500 sheets (90 g/m2 paper) 250 sheets (90 g/m2 paper) 1 sheet each for offset master or Label. Transparency film or ink-jet paper is unavailable. Capacity Unlimited Approx. 100 sheets (More than 100 sheets available dependent on paper type or weight.) Primary (main) tray Non-sort mode (80 g/m2 paper) 500 sheets (A5R, B6R) 3,000 sheets (A4, A4R, B5, B5R) (FS-513) 2,500 sheets (A4, A4R, B5, B5R, 8.5x11, 8.5x11R) (FS-606) 1,500 sheets (A3, B4, 12x18, 11x17, 8.5x14) Sort/Group mode (80 g/m2 paper) 3,000 sheets (8.5x11, 8.5x11R, A4, A4R, B5, B5R) (FS-513) 2,500 sheets (8.5x11, 8.5x11R, A4, A4R, B5, B5R) (FS-606) 1,500 sheets (12x18, 11x17, 8.5x14, A3, B4) Staple-sort mode (80 g/m2 paper) 1,000 sheets (Variable according to the number of pages to be stapled. See p. 12-5 for details)
Equipments ADU Finishe Secondary (sub) tray r (FS513/ FS606)
12-5
Paper Information
Finishe Booklet tray 100 sheets (A3, B4, 12x18, 11x17, 8.5x14) (80 r g/m2 paper) Fold: 33 sets for 3-sheet-folded booklet (FS(33 x 3 = 99 sheets, 396 pages) 606) Stitch&Fold: 20 sets for 5-sheet-folded booklet (20 x 5 = 100 sheets, 400 pages) 5 sets for 20-sheet-folded booklet (5 x 20 = 100 sheets, 400 pages) 75 sheets (A4R, 8.5x11R) (80 g/m2 paper) Fold: 25 sets for 3-sheet-folded booklet (25 x 3 = 75 sheets, 300 pages) Stitch&Fold: 12 sets for 5-sheet-folded booklet (15 x 5 = 75 sheets, 300 pages) 3 sets for 25-sheet-folded booklet (3 x 25 = 75 sheets, 300 pages) * Maximum number of folded sheet is 3 for Fold mode, and 25 for Stitch & Fold mode. Cover sheet feeder (PI-110) 200 sheets (200 g/m2) or 30 mm thick for Upper/ lower tray
Punching kit (PK-507/ Unlimited PK-508) Trimmer unit (TU-109) 512 sheets (80 g/m2 paper) (See p. 8-17 for details) Exit tray 150 sheets (90 g/m2 paper)
Paper Capacity for Staple-sort mode of FS-513/FS-606 Finisher Paper size No. of copies 2~9 10~20 21~30 31~40 41~50
A3/A3W (12"x18"/11"x17"/ 11"x17"W) B4/B4R, A4/A4W, A4R/A4WR, B5/B5W (8.5"x14", 8.5"x11"/ 8.5"x11"W, 8.5"x11"R/8.5"x11"WR)
50 sets 50 30 25 20
100 sets 50 30 25 20
12-6
Paper Information
Paper Size
Paper Trays Available Sizes Tray 1, 2, and 3 (Main STD size: A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, 13x19, 12x18, 11x17, 8.5x14, 8.5x11 body tray) STD (special): Detects F4/8.5x14R instead of A4R, 5.5x8.5R instead of A5R. Non STD size: Max. 330 mm x 487 mm (13x19.2) ~ Min. 140 mm x 210 mm Wide size: A3W, B4W, A4W, B5W, B5RW, A5RW, 11x17W, 8.5x11W, 8.5x11WR, 5.5x8.5RW LCT (LT-211) STD size: A3, B4, A4, B5, 13x19, 12x18, 11x17, 8.5x14, 8.5x11 Non STD size: Max. 330 mm x 487 mm (13x19.2) ~ Min. 182 mm x 210 mm Wide size: A3W, B4W, A4W, B5W, 11x17W, 8.5x14W, 8.5x11W
For special size setting of main body trays (Tray 1, 2, and 3), see p. 14-22.
Paper Trays Multi-sheet bypass tray
Available Sizes STD size: A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, A6R, B6R, 13x19, 12x18, 11x17, 8.5x11, 8.5x11R, 5.5x8.5R STD (special): Detects F4/8.5x14 instead of A4R, or A5R/B6R instead of 5.5x8.5R. Non STD size: Max. 330 mm x 487 mm (13 x 19.2) ~ Min. 100 mm x 148 mm Wide size: A3W, B4W, A4W, A4WR, B5W, B5WR, A5WR, A6WR, B6WR, 13x19W, 12x18W, 11x17W, 8.5x11W, 8.5x11WR, 5.5x8.5WR Available Sizes STD size / STD (special): 330 mm x 487 mm (13x19.2) to A5R Non STD size: 330 mm x 487 mm (13x19.2) to 140 mm x 182 mm Wide size: A3W to A5RW
Equipments ADU
12-7
Paper Information
Finisher (FS-513/FS606) Primary (main) tray 314 mm x 458 mm (12x18) ~ 100 mm x 148 mm 314 mm x 458 mm (12x18) ~ A4R in Sort/Group/ Staple-sort mode Secondary (sub) tray 330 mm x 487 mm (13x19.2) ~ 100 mm x 148 mm Booklet tray 314 mm x 458 mm (12x18) ~ A4R in Fold or Stitch & Fold mode A4R/8.5x11R only in Three-Fold mode Upper tray: A4, A4R, 8.5x11, 8.5x11R, 5.5x8.5 Lower tray: 314 mm x 459 mm ~ A5
Cover sheet feeder (PI-110)
Punching kit (PK-507/ A3, B4, A4, 12x18, 11x17, 8.5x11 PK-508) Trimmer unit (TU-109) A3, B4, A4R, 11x17, 8.5x14, 8.5x11R and those wide sizes Exit tray Max. 330 mm x 487 mm (13x19.2) ~ Min. 100 mm x 148 mm
See p. 3-20 for specifying the special paper size of the Multi-sheet bypass tray.
12-8
Paper Information
Special Paper in Multi-Sheet Bypass Tray
Multi-sheet bypass tray accepts the following special paper type that cannot be loaded in the main body trays. Labels
When using special paper type other than the above mentioned, select Excl.A to J as the paper type in Paper type/size setting for the Multi-sheet bypass tray.
To Store Copy Paper

Store paper in a cool, dry area. Using damp copy paper may cause a paper misfeed. Keep partially used packages tightly wrapped during storage. Do not place paper packages vertically to store. Paper curl due to the vertical storage may cause a paper misfeed.
12-9
Original Information
Use the platen glass or document feeder to position originals to copy.
Platen Glass Originals

Use the platen glass when originals are not suitable for use with the document feeder, e.g., when size is incompatible, or when originals are folded, stapled, torn, or in generally poor condition.
See each description in this manual for copy conditions which cannot use the document feeder to scan.
Unsuitable RADF Originals
Curled, creased or folded originals
Paste-ups or cut-outs
Books
Glossy or transparent originals, OHP film, art paper, cellophane
Doubled, punched or stapled originals
Thin or thick originals
Platen Glass Original Specifications

/ Max. original size: 303 mm x 438 mm, sheet or book / Max. book weight/thickness: 6.8 kg / 30 mm / Original placement: Face down on left depth side of glass Detectable paper size can be changed from only A series to Inch series, AB series, or AB series and Inch series mixed by Key Operator. See p. 14-38.
Do not place too heavy originals, or do not press strongly when thick original is placed and is under pressure of RADF; otherwise the glass may be broken and you may be injured.
12-10
RADF Originals
Following three modes are provided when using the document feeder (RADF) to scan originals. - Normal mode - Mixed Original mode - Z-Folded Original mode Specifications for each mode are described as follows.
Detectable paper size can be changed from only A series to Inch series, AB series, or AB series and Inch series mixed by Key Operator. See p. 14-38.
Normal mode
/ Detectable original size: A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, A5R, 11x17, 8.5x13, 8.5x11 / Original weight: Simplex: 35 g/m2 ~ 200 g/m2 Dulpex: 50 g/m2 ~ 200 g/m2 * Use Thin mode for 35 g/m2 ~ 49 g/m2 paper, or Thick mode for 129 g/m2 ~ 200 g/m2 paper. / Max. feeder capacity: 100 sheets (80 g/m2 paper) / Curling tolerance: 10 mm or less / Original placement: Face up
Mixed Original mode Use Mixed Original mode to copy mixed size originals. See p. 9-6 for details.
/ Original size: Three types of size combination are determined by the RADF guide width. A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, and A5 mixed B4, A4R, B5, B5R, and A5 mixed B5R and A5R mixed / Original weight: Simplex: 35g/m2 ~ 200g/m2 Dulpex: 50g/m2 ~ 200g/m2 * Use Thin mode for 35 g/m2 ~ 49 g/m2 paper, or Thick mode for 129 g/m2 ~ 200 g/m2 paper. / Max. feeder capacity: 100 sheets (80 g/m2 paper) / Curling tolerance: 10 mm or less / Original placement: Face up (see p. 3-4 for details.) See below for the guide width of each combination.
Guide width
Guide width
Guide width
12-11
Z-Folded Original mode Use Z-Folded Original mode to scan folded originals without using the size detection sensor of the RADF. See p. 9-9 for details.
/ Detectable original size: A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, A5R, 11x17, 8.5x13, 8.5x11 / Original weight: Simplex: 35 g/m2 ~ 200 g/m2 Dulpex: 50 g/m2 ~ 200 g/m2 * Use Thin mode for 35 g/m2 ~ 49 g/m2 paper, or Thick mode for 129 g/m2 ~ 200 g/m2 paper. / Max. feeder capacity: 100 sheets (80 g/m2 paper) / Curling tolerance: 10 mm or less / Original placement: Face up (see p. 3-4 for details.); orientation same as copy paper
12-12
13
Maintenance & Supplies

How to Maintain the Copier
Adding Toner......................................................................................13-2 Inserting a New Staple Cartridge into FS-513/FS-606 Finisher ........13-7 Empty Waste Basket of PK-507/PK-508 Punching Kit....................13-11 Empty Waste Basket of TU-109 Trimmer Unit .................................13-13 Exchanging Toner Recovery Box .....................................................13-15 Cleaning Image Scanning Section...................................................13-17 Checking Copy Count......................................................................13-21 Periodic Maintenance ......................................................................13-24
Adding Toner
Adding Toner
When toner supply is low, the message Please add toner and the ADD TONER icon ( ) display on the touch screen. The toner colour to be supplied is indicated by an alphabet: C (cyan), M (magenta), Y (yellow), or K (black).
Use the same number toner bottle as described on the label on the toner bottle cover. Otherwise, machine trouble may occur.
toner number label
Add toner according to the procedure as follows.
13-2
Adding Toner
1. Loosen toner by tapping both top and bottom of the new toner bottle on a solid surface at least five times, then shake the bottle at least five times.
5~6cm
5~6cm
2.
Open the toner access door.
13-3
Adding Toner
3. Unlock and open the toner bottle cover of the empty toner bottle.
2 1
4.
Partially withdraw the toner bottle, then turn it to set the Up arrow mark at the top.
5.
Fully withdraw the toner bottle straightforward to remove the bottle.
13-4
Adding Toner
6. Remove the cap of the new toner bottle, then set the same cap to the removed bottle.
New toner
Empty toner
7.
While positioning the Up arrow mark at the top and aligning the two hollow parts of the toner bottle with the salients on the bottle entrance, fully insert the new toner bottle until it locks in place.
13-5
Adding Toner
8. Close and lock the toner bottle cover, then close the toner access door.
The toner bottle cover cannot be locked if the toner bottle is not set in place.
Do not throw the empty toner bottle into a fire. If it is thrown into a fire, the toner may ignite and cause a dangerous situation.
Keep the toner bottle away from children. The toner is non-toxic; however if you inhale or contact with eyes by accident, flush with water and seek medical advice.
13-6
Inserting a New Staple Cartridge into FS-513/FS-606
Inserting a New Staple Cartridge into FS513/FS-606 Finisher

When the staple cartridge of the Finisher is empty, the Basic Screen displays the following message in the message area.
Follow the procedure below to replace the staple cartridge.
Use only the staples supplied by us. Please contact your service representative to purchase.
1.
Open the Finisher door.
13-7

2. Pull out the stacker unit by holding the stacker unit handle.
3.
Pull up the cartridge housing, then remove it while sliding it along the stapler rail.
1 2
4.
Remove the empty cartridge from the cartridge housing.
5.
Insert the new cartridge into the housing.
13-8

Firmly insert the cartridge into the housing while aligning the arrow sides of both case and housing, then remove the lock tape from the cartridge.
Do not remove the staples remaining inside the housing; otherwise, the first sheet output after the replenishment will not be stapled.
6.
Insert the cartridge housing while sliding it along the stapler rail, then push down and in to secure it in place.
7.
Return the stacker unit to its original position.
13-9

8. Close the Finisher door.
13-10
Empty Waste Basket of PK-507/PK-508 Punching Kit

When the waste basket becomes full, Waste basket of Punching kit is full / Please empty waste basket message will be displayed on the touch screen, and the finished set will be output without being punched even if Punch mode is selected.
Follow the procedure below to empty the waste basket.
1.
Open the Finisher door.
13-11

2. Withdraw the waste basket.
3.
Empty the waste basket.
4.
Return the waste basket to its original position, then close the Finisher door securely.
13-12
Empty Waste Basket of TU-109 Trimmer Unit

When the waste basket becomes full, Waste basket of Trimmer is full / Please empty waste basket message will be displayed on the touch screen, and the finished set will be output without being trimmed even if Trimming mode is selected.
Follow the procedure below to empty the waste basket.
1.
Open the trimmer front door.
13-13

2. Withdraw the waste basket.
3.
Empty the waste basket.
4.
Return the waste basket to its original position, then close the trimmer front door securely.
13-14
Exchanging Toner Recovery Box

When the toner recovery box becomes full with the used toner, Please change toner recovery box message and an icon ( ) will be displayed on the touch screen.
Follow the procedure below to exchange the toner recovery box.
DO NOT THROW the toner recovery box into a fire. If it is thrown into a fire, the toner may ignite and cause a dangerous situation.
1.
Open the toner recovery box door on the rear-right side of the machine.
13-15

2. Withdraw the toner recovery box.
3.
Remove the sticker on the toner recovery box, then put it on the inlet of the used toner.
4.
Set the new toner recovery box, then close the toner recover box door.
13-16
Cleaning Image Scanning Section

In order to maintain optimum copy quality, always keep the following areas clean.
13-17

Cleaning the Document Glass
Raise the document cover, and clean the glass with a clean soft cloth. The glass may also clean with a soft cloth dampened slightly with water, if it is difficult to clean.
Never use paint solvents, such as benzene or thinners, to clean the platen glass.
13-18

Cleaning the RADF Platen Guide Cover
The RADF platen guide cover should be kept clean; otherwise soil marks may be copied or the original size cannot be detected correctly. Raise the document cover, and clean the RADF platen guide cover with a clean soft cloth.
Never use paint solvents, such as benzene or thinners, to clean the RADF platen guide cover.
13-19

Cleaning the Platen Cover
Keep the glass clean; otherwise soil marks may be copied, resulting in dark lines on the copies. Raise the document cover, and clean the left partition glass with a clean soft cloth.
Never use paint solvents, such as benzene or thinners, to clean the platen cover.
13-20
Checking Copy Count
Checking Copy Count

This function allows you to view the current indication of the following items as a list on the touch panel: Total counter, Full colour counter, Mono colour counter, Monochrome counter, Copier counter, Printer counter, Counter start date. Check the list, then print it from the Counter List Screen, if desired.
13-21
Checking Copy Count

To Display the Counter List Screen
1. Press [P (COUNTER)] on the control panel.
The Counter List Screen will be displayed.
The Counter List Screen can be displayed even when the copying job is in progress.
2.
Touch EXIT to return to the Basic Screen.
13-22
Checking Copy Count

To Print the Counter List
1. Press [P (COUNTER)] on the control panel.
2.
Touch COUNTER MENU.
The Basic Screen will be displayed.
3. 4.
Touch the desired tray key to select the paper size. Press [START].
The Counter list will be printed out, and the Management list mode will be released automatically.
13-23
Periodic Maintenance
After a set number of copies have been made on your copier, Periodic Maintenance (PM) will be required for maintaining optimal performance. When preventive maintenance is due, a message and the icon ( you to contact your service representative for maintenance. ) will prompt
13-24
To Check the PM Counter
Follow the procedure below to check the PM counter to estimate the time when Periodic Maintenance is due.
1.
Press [P(COUNTER)] on the control panel.
2.
Press [CHECK].
The PM counter will appear under the Printer counter on the screen.
To print the Counter list including the PM counter, see p. 13-23.
3.
Touch EXIT.
13-25
13-26
14
Key Operator Mode

How to Monitor Copier Activity and Modify Machine Settings
An Outline of the Key Operator Mode ...............................................14-2 [1] System Initial Setting ....................................................................14-5 [2] Copier Initial Setting....................................................................14-11 [3] User Setting Mode ......................................................................14-12 [4] EKC (Electronic Key Counter) Function Setting..........................14-13 [5] Lock/Delete Job Memory............................................................14-21 [6] Paper Type / Special Size Set .....................................................14-22 [7] Panel Contrast / Key Sound Adjustment ....................................14-25 [8] Key Operator Data Setting ..........................................................14-26 [9] Weekly Timer...............................................................................14-27 [10] Control Panel Adjustment .........................................................14-35 [11] Tray Auto Select Setting............................................................14-36 [12] Power Save Setting...................................................................14-37 [13] Memory Switch Setting.............................................................14-38 [14] Machine Management List Print ...............................................14-45 [15] Call Remote Centre...................................................................14-46 [16] Finisher Adjustment ..................................................................14-47 [17] Front & Back Density Setting ....................................................14-49 [18] Scan Transmission Setting........................................................14-50 [19] Non-Image Area Erase Setting .................................................14-52 [20] AE Adjustment ..........................................................................14-53 [21] Execute Adjustment Operation .................................................14-54 [22] Magnification Adjustment .........................................................14-55 [23] Timing Adjustment ....................................................................14-56 [24] Centring Adjustment .................................................................14-58 [25] Printer Gamma Sensor Adjustment ..........................................14-59
An Outline of the Key Operator Mode

The Key Operator is trained to handle all special Key Operator functions that are not accessible to the general user, such as monitoring overall copier activity, machine performance, and service information, modifying machine settings as well as controlling user activity for billing purposes. A unique 4-digit Key Operator password is normally set by your service representative at installation. If the unique code is not set by your service representative, the copier will not display Key Operator Password Entry Screen when the Key Operator mode is being accessed; a Key Operator password will not be required. To ensure the security of Key Operator mode, it is recommended that you establish a unique Key Operator password, and keep it in a confidential file.
How to Access the Key Operator Mode

1. 2. Press [HELP] on the control panel to display the Help Screen. Touch KEY OPERATOR MODE on the Help Screen.
3.
Enter the Key Operator Password, then touch OK.

Use the keypad on the touch screen to enter your 4-digit Key Operator password. Touch OK to display the Key Operator Mode Screen.
14-2
The entered Key Operator password will not be displayed on the screen. If an invalid password is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit password. If the Key Operator password is not valid, check with your service representative.
4.
Make setting changes from the Key Operator Mode Screen, as described on the following pages.
To display menus [11] to [20] of the Key Operator Mode Screen, touch the lower arrow key to scroll. To return the previous menu, touch the upper arrow key. The menus [21] to [25] will be displayed and available by service setting. Contact your service representative, if desired.
14-3

5. Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to exit the Key Operator Mode.
[24] can be registered and recalled as a profile. Contact your service representative, if desired. See p. 8-26 for details. Printer Lead Edge Timing Adjustment (Side 1 / Side 2), Printer Registration Loop Adjustment (Side 1 / Side 2), Printer Centring Adjustment (Side 1 / Side 2), Printer Vertical Magnification Adjustment (Side 1 / Side 2*), Printer Horizontal Magnification Adjustment (Side 1 / Side 2) *: Available only when Memory Switch No. 42 is turned ON.
14-4
[1] System Initial Setting

Set the following initial conditions of the copier. - Date & Time setting: Current date and time, Summer time, Time difference - Language select setting: Language used in LCD - IP address setting: IP address to be accessed from PC, Line speed setting - E-mail transmission setting: E-mail address to be informed of machine trouble or request for supplies.
[1] Date & Time Setting

Set the current date and time, the summer time, and also the time difference.
/ Default setting: Summer time off
System Initial Setting Menu Screen
Date & Time Setting Screen
Difference in Time Setting Screen
Procedure 1 Touch [1] System initial setting to display the System Initial Setting Menu Screen. 2 Touch [1] Date & Time setting to display the Date & Time Setting Screen. 3 Adjust the time. The time indicated by the copier is displayed in the upper line and ordered by date, month, year and time (in 24-hour expression). (1) In the lower line, the highlighted section can be changed by using the keypad on the screen. (2) Touch SET to move the highlighted section to the number to be changed. 4 Set the Summer time. The Summer time is initially deactivated. To activate the summer time (Daylight Savings Time) function, touch Summer time to highlight it. The Present time will gain an hour. 5 The Difference in time setting is provided in order to give the time difference information at the same time when E-mail is received. To set this function, follow the procedure below. (1) Touch Diff. time setting to display the Difference in Time Setting Screen.
14-5

(2) Touch + <> to display + when the local time is earlier than the Universal time, or - when the local time is later. (3) Use the keypad on the screen to enter the time difference between the Universal time and the local time in the machine setting area. (e.g. Enter 0600 for 6 hours later than the Universal time.) (4) Touch OK to return to the Date & Time Setting Screen. 6 Touch OK to update the Present time by the Setting time and return to the System Initial Setting Menu Screen. To restore the previous setting, touch CANCEL. 7 Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen.
14-6

[2] Language Select Setting
Select the language used in the LCD.
/ Default setting: English
System Initial Setting Menu Screen Language Selection Screen
Procedure 1 Touch [1] System initial setting to display the System Initial Setting Menu Screen. 2 Touch [2] Language select setting to display the Language Selection Screen. 3 Select the desired English mode. 4 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the System Initial Setting Menu Screen, or touch CANCEL to restore the previous setting. 5 Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen.
14-7

[3] IP Address Setting
This setting is required to enable a PC to gain access to this machine. Set the line speed, if required.
NOTE: Consult your network manager to perform this setting. Incorrect setting may cause a trouble with other network systems.
System Initial Setting Menu Screen IP Address Setting Screen
IP Address Setting Screen (next page)
Line Speed Setting Screen
Procedure 1 Touch [1] System initial setting to display the System Initial Setting Menu Screen. 2 Touch [3] IP address setting to display the IP Address Setting Screen. 3 Make the required setting. (1) Touch to highlight the address key on the left. To scroll to the next page, touch the arrow key at the lower left corner on the screen. (2) Enter the address numbers using the screen keypad. (3) Touch SET to fix the numbers, or touch RESET to clear. Touching SET shifts the cursor to the right. 4 Customize the line speed. (1) Touch Line speed setting to display the Line Speed Setting Screen. (2) Touch the desired key to highlight it. (3) Touch OK to restore the IP Address Setting Screen. 5 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the System Initial Setting Menu Screen, or touch CANCEL to restore the previous setting. 6 Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen.
14-8

[4] E-Mail Transmission Setting
When the machine requires troubleshooting or maintenance such as paper or toner supply, this setting allows several network PCs to be informed of the current machine status by E-mail. The IP address of the mail server of the local network, Email address of the machine manager and of others to be informed can be set. The following information items are provided. Service call Finisher tray full Complete job Paper supply Toner supply PM call JAM Dispose of waste basket Non complete job Staple cartridge supply
NOTE: Consult your network manager to perform this setting. Incorrect setting may cause a trouble with other network systems.
System Initial Setting Menu Screen E-Mail Transmission Setting Screen
Procedure 1 Touch [1] System initial setting to display the System Initial Setting Menu Screen. 2 Touch [4] E-Mail Transmission Setting to display the E-Mail Transmission Setting Screen. 3Specify the IP address of the mail IP Address Setting Screen server. (1)Touch [1] IP address setting to display the IP Address Setting Screen. (2)Enter the IP address of the mail address in your network using screen keypad. Touch SET to fix the numbers, or touch RESET to clear. Touching SET shifts the cursor to the right. (3) Touch OK to restore the E-Mail Transmission Setting Screen.
14-9

4 Specify the E-mail address of the network manager.
E-Mail Set (Machine Manager) Screen E-Mail Address Input Screen
7 8
(1) Touch [2] E-Mail set <machine manager>. (2) Touch Input key indicate, then enter the E-mail address of the network manager using screen keypad. Touch OK to restore the E-Mail Set (Machine Manager) Screen. (3) Touch OK to restore the EMail Transmission Setting Screen. Specify the E-mail address of the E-Mail Set (Condition Inform) Screen network PC(s). (1) Touch [3] E-Mail set <condition inform>. (2) Touch Input key indicate, then enter the E-mail address of the network PC using screen keypad. Touch OK to restore the EMail Set (Condition Inform) Screen. (3) Touch OK to restore the E-Mail Transmission Setting Screen. Select the information items. (1) Touch [4] E-Mail transmission Transmission Item Setting Screen item set to display the Information Setting Screen. (2) Touch the desired item key to highlight it. More than one item can be selected. Touching ALL CLEAR will release all the selections. (3) Touch OK to restore the E-Mail Transmission Setting Screen. Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to complete the setting and return to the System Initial Setting Menu Screen. Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen.
14-10
[2] Copier Initial Setting
[2] Copier Initial Setting

Initial settings are the settings that display automatically when the copier is powered on, when Auto Reset timer or Power Saver is operated, when the EKC password is entered, when the key counter is set, or when [AUTO RESET] key is pressed. Initially, i.e., at installation, the Basic Screen displays the following condition to meet Energy Star requirements: Colour Mode: Copy Mode: Paper Size: Lens Mode: Output Mode: Full colour 1-1 APS 1:1 Offset sort
NOTE: The most commonly-used settings are established at installation. Before changing any of the copier settings, be sure that you understand the overall and long-range effect of the change.
Key Operator Mode Screen Copier Initial Setting Screen
Procedure 1 Touch [2] Copier initial setting to display the Copier Initial Setting Screen. 2 Make a selection for each mode as initial settings. Touch RADF to select or deselect it.
NOTE: The machine will restore the initial settings specified as above unless the Memory switch No. 4 Job memory (30) auto recall is turned ON with the Job memory No. 30 registered.
3 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Key Operator Mode Screen, or touch CANCEL to restore the previous setting.
14-11
[3] User Setting Mode
[3] User Setting Mode

Set the user-set magnification ratio.
[1] User Lens Mode Ratio Setting

The preset and userset ratios available on the Basic Screen are used to reduce and enlarge the original image to accommodate copy paper size. Normally, users are allowed to change the three USERSETs in the bottom line on the User Lens Mode Ratio Setting Screen. The preset keys in the top and middle lines can be programmed in 2-5 DIP SW mode for special purposes, but ordinarily, it is recommended that they remain unchanged. Default setting: - USERSET1: 4.000 - USERSET2: 2.000 - USERSET3: 0.500
User Setting Mode Menu Screen User Lens Mode Ratio Setting Screen
Procedure 1 Touch [3] User setting mode to display the User Setting Mode Menu Screen. 2 Touch [1] User lens mode ratio setting to display the User Lens Mode Ratio Setting Screen. 3 Touch the USERSET you want to change, then enter a ratio from 0.250 ~ 4.000, using the keypad. If a ratio under 0.250 is entered, 0.250 will be displayed. If a ratio over 4.000 is entered, 4.000 will be displayed. 4 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the User Setting Mode Menu Screen, or touch CANCEL to restore the previous setting. 5 Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen.
14-12
[4] EKC (Electronic Key Counter) Function Setting

The Electronic Key Counter allows you to monitor all copying activity by controlling EKC password accounts. When the EKC is activated, copying can be performed only after a valid EKC password is entered. This feature can track copier usage for individual users and/or accounts as well as limit copier access to only authorized users. Copy quantity limits for specific accounts can also be set. Copy quantity and copy limits for each account can be visually confirmed on the screen. If EKC needs to be activated on your machine, contact your service representative. The following EKC settings can be made by the Key Operator: [1] E.K.C. data edit: Assign an account number to an individual user or a group, and specify an EKC password, name, and copy limit for each. The registered EKC data will be listed on the screen, allowing you to change the data, reset the copy count, or even delete the individual account. [2] E.K.C. all count reset: Clear the copy count for all accounts. [3] E.K.C. function setting: Turn the EKC function on or off, and set conditions to stop immediately, stop after job is completed or display a warning message when copy limit is reached. [4] Scanner function setting: Turn the EKC function on or off while the machine is in Scanner mode. This setting is available even if the print controller is not installed in the machine.
14-13

How to Access the EKC Setting Mode
Key Operator Mode Screen EKC Master Key Code Screen
EKC Setting Menu Screen
Procedure 1 Touch [4] E.K.C. function setting. The EKC Master Key Code Screen displays if a code is required. 2 Use the keypad on the touch screen to enter your 8-digit EKC master key code, then touch OK to display the EKC Setting Menu Screen. NOTES:
1 The EKC master key code will be specified by your service representative and should be kept secret by the Key Operator. 2 If an invalid EKC master key code is entered, continue by entering the valid 8-digit code. 3 Touch CANCEL on the EKC Master Key Code Screen to return to the Key Operator Mode Screen.
3 Select the desired EKC function, and make settings as required. 4 To exit the EKC mode, touch PREVIOUS SCREEN on EKC Setting Menu Screen. The Key Operator Mode Screen will be restored.
14-14

[1] E.K.C. Data Edit
Use this setting to display the list of copy, printer, or scanner count and limit for each account, to change, add, or delete the EKC data, and to reset the copy count of the individual account.
/ EKC No.: Designated by Key Operator / EKC Password: Unique 8-digit numeric code programmed by Key Operator for user / User Name: Max. 8 characters / Limit: Limit target, Count 0 to 999,999 copies, Permission for use
EKC Setting Menu Screen EKC Data Edit Screen
EKC Data Change Screen
EKC Data Add Screen
EKC Limit Setting Popup Menu
Password Duplication Screen
Name Duplication Screen
14-15

Procedure 1 Display the EKC Setting Menu Screen, referring to p. 14-14. 2 Touch [1] E.K.C. data edit. The EKC Data Edit Screen will be displayed.
NOTE: The EKC Data Edit Screen provides three sorts of EKC data; copier, printer, and scanner. Touch COPY, PRINTER, or SCANNER to display the desired screen.
To change, add, or delete the EKC data, and to reset the copy count of an individual account, follow the procedure for each as described below. To Add EKC Data: (1) Select the desired machine mode, then touch Add on the EKC Data Edit Screen. The EKC Data Add Screen will be displayed. (2) Note that the Password key is highlighted on the screen. Enter the password by using the touch screen keypad. Max. 8 digits can be specified. (3) Touch Name to highlight it, then enter the desired name using the touch screen keypad. Max. 8 characters can be specified. (4) Touch Limit to display the EKC Limit Setting popup menu. Select COPY or PRINTER, then select Common set or Separate set, as desired. Select Common set to specify a common limit for all copying jobs. Select Separate set to specify a limit separately for colour copies and monochrome copies. (5) Specify the desired limit using control panel keypad. Max. 6 digits (999,999 copies) can be specified. (6) Select PERMIT or PROHIBIT to enable or disable copying jobs in each mode. If PROHIBIT is selected, copying job cannot be made in that mode. (7) Touch OK to return to the EKC Data Add Screen. NOTES:
1 We recommend that you make a list of all EKC passwords and account numbers. 2 If an invalid user name or numeric value is entered, continue by entering the valid one.
(8) Touch OK to complete the setting and to verify whether the same password or name has been already used for another account number. When a password is duplicated: The Password Duplication Screen will be displayed. Touch YES to re-enter new password, or NO to create duplicate password. NOTE:
If duplicate password is created, the number of copies will be counted only for the EKC password with the smallest number. We recommend you do not use duplicate EKC passwords. When a name is duplicated: The Name Duplication Screen will be displayed. Touch OK to re-enter new name.
(9) If any duplication has not occur, the EKC Data Edit Screen will be restored. To Change EKC Data: (1) Touch o or n key on the right side of the list to highlight the EKC data to be changed, then touch Change. The EKC Data Change Screen will be displayed. (2) Touch the desired item key to highlight it, then enter new data by using the touch screen keypad. Password: 8 digits max. (See note 1.) Name: 8 characters max. (See note 2.) Limit: 999,999 copies max. / Limit Target / Permission for use
14-16

NOTES:
1 We recommend that you make a list of all EKC passwords and account numbers. 2 If an invalid user name or numeric value is entered, continue by entering the valid one.
(3) Touch OK to complete the setting and to verify whether the same password or name has been already used for another account number. When a password is duplicated: The Password Duplication Screen will be displayed. Touch YES to re-enter new password, or NO to create duplicate password. NOTE:
If duplicate password is created, the number of copies will be counted only for the EKC password with the smallest number. We recommend you do not use duplicate EKC passwords.
When a name is duplicated: The Name Duplication Screen will be displayed. Touch OK to re-enter new name. (4) If any duplication has not occur, the EKC Data Edit Screen will be restored. To Delete EKC Data: (1) Touch o or n key on the right side of the list to highlight the EKC data to be deleted, then touch Delete. The Delete Confirmation Screen will be displayed. (2) Touch YES to delete, or NO to cancel. To Clear EKC Count: (1) Touch o or n key on the right side of the list to highlight the desired EKC data, then touch Count Reset. The Reset Confirmation Screen will be displayed. (2) Touch the desired colour mode key to clear the copy count of the selected mode.
Delete Confirmation Screen Reset Confirmation Screen
3 Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN on the EKC Data Edit Screen to return to the EKC Setting Menu Screen. 4 Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen.
14-17

[2] E.K.C. All Count Reset
Reset the count for all EKC accounts.
EKC All Count Reset Screen
Procedure 1 Display the EKC Setting Menu Screen, referring to p. 14-14. 2 Touch [2] E.K.C. all count reset. The EKC All Count Reset Screen will be displayed. 3 Touch YES to reset all counters to zero and to return to the EKC Setting Menu Screen, or touch NO to cancel. 4 Touching PREVIOUS SCREEN will also cancel this function and return to the EKC Setting Menu Screen. 5 Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN on the EKC Setting Menu Screen to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen.
14-18

[3] E.K.C. Function Setting
Use this function to turn EKC On or Off and to select whether the copier will stop at the time the count limit is reached, or after the current copy job is completed.
NOTE: If EKC Off is selected on the machine with this function previously activated, copying operation will become available without entering an EKC password, while the counting function will be suspended.
EKC Setting Menu Screen EKC Function Setting Screen
Procedure 1 Display the EKC Setting Menu Screen, referring to p. 14-14. 2 Touch [3] E.K.C. function setting. The EKC Function Setting Screen will be displayed. 3 Touch EKC On to activate EKC or touch EKC Off to de-activate EKC. The selected key will be highlighted. 4 Select the desired machine condition when the count limit is reached. The selected key will be highlighted. Touch Immediately to stop the machine at once when the copy limit is reached. In this case, copy conditions selected for the current job will be cleared. To continue the job using the same user password, change the copy limit of the password or clear the copy count. Touch After job to stop the machine after the current job is completed, when copy limit is reached. Copying job will be unavailable with the message Copy limit reached displayed on the screen. Touch Warning only to display a warning message when copy limit is reached. The message Copy limit reached will be displayed on the screen, while copying job can be continued. 5 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the EKC Setting Menu Screen, or touch CANCEL to cancel. 6 Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen.
14-19

[4] Scanner Function Setting
Use this function to turn EKC On or Off while the machine is in Scanner mode. This setting is available even if the machine is not equipped with the optional IP-901 Print Controller.
Scanner Function Setting Screen
Procedure 1 Display the EKC Setting Menu Screen, referring to p. 14-14. 2 Touch [4] Scanner function setting. The Scanner Function Setting Screen will be displayed. 3 Touch EKC On to activate EKC or touch EKC Off to de-activate EKC. The selected key will be highlighted. 4 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the EKC Setting Menu Screen, or touch CANCEL to cancel. 5 Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen.
14-20
[5] Lock/Delete Job Memory
[5] Lock/Delete Job Memory

Use this function to lock/unlock or delete a Job that has been programmed using Job Memory function.
Key Operator Mode Screen Lock/Delete Job Memory Screen
Procedure 1 Touch [5] Lock/delete job memory to display the Lock/Delete Job Memory Screen. 2 To lock/unlock a Job memory: (1) Touch the key on the left side of the desired Job number. Use arrow keys to scroll to the desired Job number, if required. (2) The lock icon will appear on the touched key to show that the selected job is locked. The previously locked Job will be unlocked when selected, and the lock icon on the touched key will disappear.
NOTE: The settings of a locked Job cannot be changed.
To delete a Job memory: (1) Touch the Job number key you want to delete. The selected key will be highlighted. (2) Touch Delete. Selected programs and the name will be deleted from the Job memory.
NOTE: A locked job can also be deleted, with the lock on it released at the same time. Once deleted, the programs cannot be restored.
3 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Key Operator Mode Screen, or touch CANCEL to restore the previous setting.
14-21
[6] Paper Type / Special Size Set

Copy speed may vary depending on paper type or weight. For more detailed information, contact your service representative.

Use this function to indicate a specific paper type and weight, or to specify a special paper size for main body tray keys on the Basic Screen. This is especially useful when special paper is used on a regular basis and is always placed in a specific paper tray.
Key Operator Mode Screen
Paper Type / Special Size Setting Menu Scree
Paper Type Setting Screen (Main Body Trays) Special Size Setting Screen (STD size)
Special Size Setting Screen (STD size (special)Special Size Setting Screen (Non STD size)
Special Size Setting Screen (Wide size (select)Special Size Setting Screen (Wide size (input)
NOTE: Service setting is required to use the paper types Excl. A to J. Contact your service representative, if desired.
14-22

Procedure 1 Touch [6] Paper type / Special size set to display the Paper Type / Special Size Setting Menu Screen. 2 Touch [1] Paper type / Special size set. The Paper Type Setting Screen will be displayed. 3 Specify paper type and weight. (1) Touch the desired tray key to highlight it. (2) Touch the desired paper type and weight keys to highlight them. To select a type from Excl. A to J, use up/down arrow key to display the desired type on the key above, then touch the key to highlight it. The selected paper type and number indicating the paper weight will appear on the tray key. 4 Specify special size. (1) Touch Special size setting on the Paper Type Setting Screen to display the Special Size Setting Screen. (2) Touch the desired tray key to highlight it. Touch a paper size key to specify a paper size for the selected tray. Select STD size to allow the machine to automatically detect the size of paper loaded in the tray and indicate it on the tray key. If tray 4 is selected in step (2), selecting STD size will display the popup menu to show available paper sizes to be specified. Use arrow keys on the popup menu to select the desired size. Select STD size (special) to display the popup menu to show available paper sizes to be specified. Use arrow keys on the popup menu to select the desired size. Select Non STD size to display the popup menu to enter the paper size by using arrow keys or touch screen keypad. The selected tray key will indicate SPECIAL instead of the entered numeric value. Select Wide size paper to display the popup menu to show available wide paper sizes to be specified. Use arrow keys on the popup menu to select the desired wide size. Touch Lead edge or Rear edge to select the image starting position. Then, touch Input size to display the popup menu to enter the actual paper size using arrow keys or touch screen keypad. The entered number should fall within the range from the standard size of the selected wide size, to a maximum of 330 mm x 487 mm.
NOTE: When selecting Wide size paper, be sure to input the actual paper size to be used.
5 Touch OK on the Special Size Setting Screen to complete the setting and return to the Paper Type / Special Size Setting Menu Screen, or touch CANCEL to restore the previous setting. 6 Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to return to the Key Operator Mode Screen.
14-23

[2] Paper Type Set (Bypass)
Use this function to specify six combinations of paper type and weight for the Multisheet bypass tray. Specified combinations will be used when selecting Bypass on the Basic Screen.
NOTE: Service setting is required to use the paper types Excl, A to J. Contact your service representative, if desired.
Paper Type / Special Size Setting Menu Scree
Paper Type Setting Screen (Multi-Sheet Bypa
Procedure 1 Touch [6] Paper type / Special size set to display the Paper Type / Special Size Setting Menu Screen. 2 Touch [2] Paper type set (Bypass). The Paper Type Setting Screen will be displayed. 3 Select the paper type and weight in combination to be loaded in the Multi-sheet bypass tray. (1) Touch the desired key in the Special setting section to highlight it. (2) Touch the desired paper type and weight keys to highlight them. To select a type from Excl. A to J, use up/down arrow key to display the desired type on the key above, then touch the key to highlight it. The selected paper type and number indicating the paper weight will appear on the tray key. Repeat steps (1) and (2) for all the six keys. 4 Touch OK on the Paper Type Setting Screen to complete the setting and return to the Paper Type / Special Size Setting Menu Screen, or touch CANCEL to restore the previous setting. 5 Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to return to the Key Operator Mode Screen.
14-24
[7] Panel Contrast / Key Sound Adjustment
[7] Panel Contrast / Key Sound Adjustment

Use this feature to adjust the level of brightness of the touch screen portion of the control panel, and also the volume of the touch key.
NOTE: The control panel contrast feature can be adjusted from the Help screen.
Panel Contrast / Key Sound Adjustment Scree
Procedure 1 Touch [7] Panel contrast / Key sound adj. to display the Panel Contrast / Key Sound Adjustment Screen. 2 Adjust the Backlight contrast or Buzzer volume, as desired. Touch the Dimmer arrow key to make the backlight contrast dimmer than currently displayed, or touch the Brighter arrow key to make the panel or backlight contrast brighter than currently displayed. Touch the Small or Big arrow key to regulate the buzzer volume of the touch keys. 3 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Key Operator Mode Screen.
14-25
[8] Key Operator Data Setting
[8] Key Operator Data Setting

Use this screen to enter the name and extension number of the Key Operator indicated on the Help Screen that develops from the Basic Screen.
Key Operator Data Setting Screen
Procedure 1 Touch [8] Key operator data setting to display the Key Operator Data Setting Screen. 2 Touch Name to highlight it, then enter the key operator name up to 8 characters from the touch screen keypad. 3 Touch Key Operator Tel. No. to highlight it, then enter a 5-digit extension number from the touch screen keypad. If the extension number is less than 5 digits, use a hyphen [-] to make it five. The hyphen added in the beginning will be indicated as a space on the Help Screen. 4 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Key Operator Mode Screen, or touch CANCEL to restore the previous setting.
14-26
[9] Weekly Timer
[9] Weekly Timer

The Weekly Timer is a copier management function that shuts down power to the machine on a daily or hourly basis, and can be programmed specifically for lunch breaks, weekends and holidays, or any time the copier is not required. In addition, Timer Interrupt can be enabled (with or without a password requirement) to allow temporary use of the machine during periods when power is shut down by the Timer function. This function can be accessed only by the Key Operator after a unique 4-digit Weekly Timer password is entered. To ensure the security of this management function, it is recommended that you establish a unique password, and keep it in a confidential file. The Weekly Timer is not initially activated. If this function needs to be activated on your machine, contact your service representative. Conditions required to use the Weekly Timer - The power plug is inserted into the socket. The Weekly Timer will not function with the machine being unplugged, while the setting data will remain. - The power switch is turned on. - The current date and time are correctly set. The following Weekly Timer settings can be made. [1] Weekly timer ON/OFF setting Enable and disable the Timer function. [2] Timer Setting Specify the times that the copier will turn ON and OFF for each day of the week or the entire week. [3] Timer action ON/OFF Setting Specify the working days of the machine by the Timer, for all Mondays through Sundays, and/or individually for each day of the specified month. [4] Lunch hour off setting Specify the lunch time interval during which the copier will turn off and on. [5] Timer interrupt password set Require password entry for the Timer off function and establish the amount of usage time.
14-27
[9] Weekly Timer

How to Access the Weekly Timer Setting Mode
Key Operator Mode Screen Weekly Timer Master Key Code Screen
Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen
Procedure 1 Touch [9] Weekly timer on the Key Operator Mode Screen. The Weekly Timer Password Setting Screen displays, if a password is required. Otherwise, the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen displays without the password requirement.
NOTE: The Weekly Timer does not initially require the password setting. To ensure the security of this management function, it is recommended that you establish a unique password
2 If the Weekly Timer Password Setting Screen is displayed, use the keypad on the touch screen to enter your 4-digit Weekly Timer password, then touch OK to display the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen.
NOTE: If an invalid Weekly Timer password is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit password.
3 Select the desired Weekly Timer function, and make settings, as required. 4 To exit the Weekly Timer mode, touch PREVIOUS SCREEN on the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen to return to the Key Operator Mode Screen.
14-28
[9] Weekly Timer

[1] Weekly Timer On/Off Setting
Select to activate or deactivate the Weekly Timer function.
Weekly Timer On/Off Setting Screen
Procedure 1 Touch [1] Weekly timer ON/OFF setting on the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen to display the Weekly Timer On/Off Setting Screen. 2 Touch Weekly timer On to activate Weekly Timer, or touch Weekly timer Off to deactivate Weekly Timer. The selected key will be highlighted. The default setting is Weekly Timer Off.
NOTE: If you select Weekly timer On to activate this function, be sure to keep the power switch turned on.
3 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen, or touch CANCEL to restore the previous setting. 4 Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN on the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen.
14-29
[9] Weekly Timer

[2] Timer Setting
Use this function to set the On/Off times in hours and minutes for each day of the week or set the collective time for the entire week, i.e., the same On/Off time for each day.
Weekly Timer On/Off Time Setting Screen
Weekly Timer On/Off Time Collective Setting S
Procedure 1 Touch [2] Timer setting on the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen to display the Weekly Timer On/Off Time Setting Screen. 2 When the screen is displayed, the ON-time of Monday is always highlighted. Enter a 2-digit ON-hour and a 2-digit ON-minute using the touch screen keypad, and then touch SET. Monday OFF-time will be highlighted. Repeat this procedure to set all the On/Off times from Monday through Sunday. NOTES:
The time is set in terms of the 24 hour clock, where hour [01] is the first hour after midnight; and hour [24] is midnight. For example, 6 a.m. is 06:00 hours; 6 p.m. is 18:00 hours. If wrong number is entered, continue by entering the correct time. Touching SET repeatedly will shift the input section from Monday ON, Monday OFF, Tuesday ON, Tuesday OFF. When setting Sunday OFF-time, Monday ON-time is highlighted again. If ON-time and OFF-time are the same, power will not go on. If the setting is 00:00~00:00, you will not be able to set the copiers off/on condition for specific days. Be sure to enter the ON/OFF-time for a day off also, so that you can specify the machine working days on the Weekly Timer Working Day Individual/Collective Setting Screen.
3 To set the ON/OFF time collectively for more than one day of the week, touch Block timer setting to display the Weekly Timer On/Off Time Collective Setting Screen. When you open this screen, the ON and OFF times are always set at 00:00~00:00. Touch to highlight the day(s) of the week to be set. More than one can be selected at a time. Enter the ON-time and OFF-time using the touch screen keypad, and then touch SET after each entry. See step 2 for details in entering the time.
14-30
[9] Weekly Timer

4 Touch OK on the Weekly Timer On/Off Time Setting Screen or on the Weekly Timer On/Off Time Collective Setting Screen to complete the setting, and return to the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen. Touching CANCEL will restore the previous setting, and return to the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen. 5 Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN on the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen.
14-31
[9] Weekly Timer

[3] Timer Action On/Off Setting
Use this function to set the On/Off condition of the copier for a given month. Set the On/Off condition for specific days or collectively, for all Mondays through Sundays of the given month. The default setting is collective: On for Mondays through Saturdays, and Off for Sundays.
Timer Action On/Off Setting Screen
Timer Action Change Confirmation Screen
Procedure 1 Touch [3] Timer action ON/OFF setting on the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen to display the Timer Action On/Off Setting Screen. 2 The days of the current month are displayed on the left half of the screen, with timer-active days highlighted. To activate or deactivate the Timer for any individual day, touch the key for that day to change its indication. To change the month, use arrows to scroll to the desired month. 3 To collectively set the on/off data for the entire month by the day of the week, touch the ON or OFF key for the desired day on the right half of the screen to highlight it. 4 If any change is made in the collective setting area, the Timer Action Change Confirmation Screen will be displayed. Touch YES to change the timer action, or touch NO to cancel. 5 Touch OK on the Timer Action On/Off Setting Screen to complete the setting and return to the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen, or touch CANCEL to restore the previous setting. 6 Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN on the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen.
14-32
[9] Weekly Timer

[4] Lunch Hour Off Setting
The Weekly Timer function turns the copier ON and OFF once a day. Use the Lunch hour off function to shut down power during the lunch break and then turn it on again according to the Weekly Timer function setting. Only one offtime interval can be programmed.
Lunch Hour Off Setting Screen
Procedure 1 Touch [4] Lunch hour off setting on the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen to display the Lunch Hour Off Setting Screen. 2 Touch Function Valid to activate the Lunch hour off function. Set OFF-time and Restart-time using the touch screen keypad, and then touch SET after each entry. 3 Touch Function Invalid to de-activate the Lunch hour off function. The time setting area will appear grayed out and cannot be selected. The Function Invalid setting is the factory default setting. 4 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen. If other Weekly Timer setting changes are required, select the desired menu item, from [1]~[5]. 5 Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN on the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen.
14-33
[9] Weekly Timer

[5] Timer Interrupt Password Setting
Use this password setting mode to establish a 4-digit password requirement for using Timer Interrupt function. The default password of 0000 allows the timer function to be interrupted without the requirement for password entry.
Timer Interrupt Password Setting Screen
Procedure 1 Touch [5] Timer interrupt password set on the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen to display the Timer Interrupt Password Setting Screen. 2 Use the touch screen keypad to enter a 4-digit password, and then touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen.
NOTE: When the password setting is 0000, Timer Interrupt can be used simply by turning the copier OFF, then ON. In this case, you will be asked to enter the duration of use (a period of time to turn the copier power on).
3 If other Weekly Timer setting changes are required, select the desired menu item, from [1]~[5]. 4 Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN on the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen.
14-34
[10] Control Panel Adjustment
[10] Control Panel Adjustment

Use this feature to check the LCD touch screen and realign the position of the touch sensor that may have shifted.
Control Panel Adjustment Screen
Procedure 1 Touch [10] Control panel adjustment on the Key Operator Mode Screen to display the Control Panel Adjustment Screen. 2 Touch the + symbol at the upper right corner, then lower left corner on the screen. The present coordinates will be displayed in the message area of the screen. 3 Check that the X coordinate and Y coordinate displayed in the first line of the message area fall within the standard value displayed in the second line. 4 Touch the CHECK BUTTONs at the upper left and lower right corners on the screen to check if the buzzer tone functions normally. 5 If the coordinates fall out of the range of the standard value in step 3, or the buzzer tone does not sound in step 4, repeat the adjustment procedure from 2 to 4 or contact your service representative. 6 Press [1] of the control panel keypad to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen.
14-35
[11] Tray Auto Select Setting
[11] Tray Auto Select Setting

Select whether the tray size setting will be detected or not detected when ATS/APS functions. If you select it to be detected, you may also select the priority of the detection for each tray.
Key Operator Mode Screen 1
Key Operator Mode Screen 2
Tray Auto Select Setting Screen
Procedure 1 Touch [11] Tray auto select setting to display the Tray Auto Select Setting Screen. 2 On the left half of the screen, touch to highlight each tray key, then select OFF or ON to specify whether the selected tray is to be automatically detected or not when ATS/APS functions. Tray keys specified as ATS/APS ON will appear on the right half of the screen. 3 Specify the priority of the trays. Touch to highlight the desired tray key, then change its priority by using Up + and Down , arrow keys. 4 Touch OK to complete the setting and restore the Key Operator Mode Screen, or touch CANCEL to restore the previous setting.
14-36
[12] Power Save Setting
[12] Power Save Setting

Select the interval of time that must elapse before Auto Low Power and Auto Shut Off become activated.
Power Save Setting Screen
Procedure 1 Touch [12] Power save setting on the Key Operator Mode Screen to display the Timer Setting Screen. 2 The periods of time currently selected for each power save function are located on the Timer Setting Screen below the Auto Low Power and Auto Shut Off indicators. Touch the arrow keys (+) and (,) in each area to select a specific waiting period before activating the Auto Low Power or Auto Shut Off. NOTES:
The period of time selected for Auto Low Power cannot exceed the Auto Shut Off setting. If the same period of time as Auto Shut Off is selected for Auto Low Power, the Auto Shut Off will function instead of Auto Low Power.
3 Touch OK on the Timer Setting Screen to complete the setting and restore the Key Operator Mode screen, or touch CANCEL to restore the previous setting.
14-37
[13] Memory Switch Setting

This function allows you to change the Memory Settings listed below. SW No. Item No. 01: Auto reset timer No. 02: No. 03: No. 04: No. 05: No. 06: No. 07: No. 08: No. 09: No. 10: No. 11: No. 12: No. 13: No. 14: No. 15: No. 16: No. 17: No. 18: No. 19: No. 20: No. 21: No. 22: No. 23: No. 24: No. 25: No. 26: Setting (default is underlined) OFF / 30 sec. / 60 sec. / 90 sec. / 120 sec./150 sec. / 180 sec. / 210 sec. / 240 sec. / 270 sec. / 300 sec. AUTO RESET key function Full-Auto / Initial Setting RADF-Original effect RADF+AUTO RESET key selected / RADF selected Job memory auto recall (30) OFF / ON Finisher mode by Full-auto Face down (Sub tray) / Non-sort / Sort / Staple sort / Stitch&Fold / Fold / Face up (Sub tray) Initial by Key counter insert OFF / ON Erasure outside area of orig. Erased for except Platen (1:1) / Area outside of orig. erased / Erased for APS/AMS only RADF frame erasure selection None / 1mm frame / 2mm frame / 3mm frame / 4mm frame / 5mm frame Automatic tray switching OFF / ON Platen APS OFF / ON RADF APS OFF / ON Platen AMS OFF / ON RADF AMS OFF / ON Select tray when APS cancel APS preferential tray / Tray 1 / Tray 2 / Tray 3 / Tray 4 / Bypass tray Platen original size detect Only A series / Full size / AB series / Inch series RADF original size detect Only A series / Full size / AB series / Inch series Platen orig. size detect (SMALL) A5R / B6R / 5.5x8.5R / B5 / A4 / 8.5x11 / A6R Rotation ON-APS/AMS only / ON-APS/AMS/ Reduce only / ON-Always Staple mode reset-function OFF / ON Job offset operating OFF / ON Continuation print Copier:OFF/Printer:OFF / Copier:ON/ Printer:ON / Copier:ON/Printer:OFF / Copier:OFF/Printer:ON Key click sound OFF / ON 1 SHOT indication time 3 seconds / 5 seconds Power save screen Shut off mode / Low power mode START key latch function OFF / ON STOP key function JOB momentary stop / JOB cancel
14-38

SW No. Item No. 27: Auto select of Booklet copy No. 28: No. 29: No. 30: No. 31: No. 32: No. 33: No. 34: No. 35: No. 36: No. 37: No. 38: No. 39: No. 40: Setting (default is underlined) Automatic selection / Non Automatic selection E.K.C. password Under 8 digits / 8 digits Arrow key change (Image Shift) Decimal point off (1 STEP 1mm) / Decimal point on (1 STEP 0.1mm) An interruption suspended way Division of a number of copies / During of a number of copies E.K.C. password input timing Auto reset timer / Complete job Sound (No paper, toner/JAM) OFF / 3 seconds / 5 seconds / 10 seconds Reserve copy function Reserve copy by folder select / Reserve copy by original set Change page no. pos. (booklet) OFF / ON (Outside page numbering) Trimmer (STD/Non STD size) STD size / Non STD size Timer which prohibits Print OFF / 15 seconds / 30 seconds / 60 seconds / 90 seconds Bookmark function ON (It is cancel every JOB) / ON (It is not cancel every JOB) / OFF Delete of overlay image Permission (Delete/Overwrite) / Prohibition (Delete/Overwrite) Orig. direction/Binding mode It is cancel every JOB / It is not cancel SCREEN (Line Screen) OFF / HighReso:Use SmoothTone:Use / HighReso:Use SmoothTone/NoUse / HighReso:NoUse SmoothTone:Use SCREEN (Dot Screen) OFF / HighReso:Use SmoothTone:Use / HighReso:Use SmoothTone/NoUse / HighReso:NoUse SmoothTone:Use Side 2 drum clock adjust mode OFF / ON Screen (FullColour - Text/Photo) HighCompression / LineScreenHighResolution / LineScreenSmoothTone / DotScreenHighResolution / DotScreenSmoothTone Screen (FullColour - Photo) HighCompression / LineScreenHighResolution / LineScreenSmoothTone / DotScreenHighResolution / DotScreenSmoothTone Screen (Monochrome - Text/ HighCompression / LineScreenPhoto) HighResolution / LineScreenSmoothTone / DotScreenHighResolution / DotScreenSmoothTone
No. 41:
No. 42: No. 43:
No. 44:
No. 45:
14-39

SW No. Item No. 46: Screen (Monochrome - Photo) Setting (default is underlined) HighCompression / LineScreenHighResolution / LineScreenSmoothTone / DotScreenHighResolution / DotScreenSmoothTone HighCompression / LineScreenHighResolution / LineScreenSmoothTone / DotScreenHighResolution / DotScreenSmoothTone HighCompression / LineScreenHighResolution / LineScreenSmoothTone / DotScreenHighResolution / DotScreenSmoothTone Normal / Wide OFF / ON Not keep / Keep Short / Standard OFF / ON PDF / TIFF / JPEG PDF / TIFF / JPEG AUTO / ON / OFF ON / OFF Prefer Image Quality / Prefer Speed
Memory Switch Setting Screen
No. 47: Screen (MonoColour - Text/ Photo)
No. 48: Screen (MonoColour - Photo)
No. 49: No. 50: No. 51: No. 52: No. 53: No. 54: No. 55: No. 56: No. 57: No. 58:
Colour gamut Auto select binding mode State of Platen/RADF (Reset) Time lag to switch tray Printer Non STD centring Scan E-Mail Form default Scan FTP Form default LCT air assist fan Exit cooling fan (No finisher) Finisher operating (Thick)
Procedure 1 Touch [13] Memory switch setting to display the Memory Switch Setting Screen. 2 To select the desired item, touch the arrow keys (+) and (,) at the right of the Memory Switch Setting Screen to highlight it. To scroll, touch the arrow keys at the lower left corner of the screen. 3 To change the setting of the highlighted item, touch Change Setting Contents repeatedly till the desired setting is displayed. Repeat above steps 2 to 3 to make several changes in succession. 4 Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN on the Memory Switch Setting Screen to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen. The following functions can be provided by the Memory Switch settings.
14-40

[1] Auto reset timer Set the reset interval starting from the completion of a copying job until the machine returns to the initial condition. [2] AUTO RESET key function Set the condition of the following modes when [AUTO RESET] is pressed: Copy mode, Copy density, Magnification, Tray selection. [3] RADF-Original effect Set the machine condition when original is set on RADF in non-RADF mode with RADF unit closed. [4] Job memory auto recall (30) Job memory number 30 is automatically recalled when power is turned on or when Auto-reset is restored. This job recall function works only when Job number 30 is registered. [5] Finisher mode by Full-auto Set the Output Mode to be recalled when [AUTO RESET] is pressed. [6] Initial by Key counter insert Set the machine to return to the initial state when Key counter is inserted. [7] Erasure outside area of original Set the machine to delete the outside area of originals. [8] RADF frame erasure selection Set Frame erasure to function anytime in RADF mode. [9] Automatic tray switching When paper is depleted during a copying job, the copier continues copying by switching to another tray that contains the same size paper. [10] Platen APS The copier automatically selects the same size copy paper as the original placed on the platen glass. (In reduction or enlargement mode, an appropriate paper size is selected according to the ratio selected.) [11] RADF APS The copier automatically selects the same size copy paper as the original placed on the RADF. (In reduction/enlargement mode, an appropriate paper size is selected according to the ratio.) [12] Platen AMS The copier detects the size of the platen original and selects the appropriate magnification ratio to correspond to the selected paper size. [13] RADF AMS After detecting the original size placed on the RADF the copier automatically selects an appropriate ratio for the copy when paper size is selected manually. [14] Select tray when APS cancel Select the tray to be automatically selected when APS is released. [15] Platen original size detect Select the series of the original paper size detected from the platen glass.
14-41

[16] RADF original size detect Select the series of the original paper size detected from the RADF. [17] Platen orig. size detect (SMALL) Select the minimum original size detected from the platen glass. [18] Rotation Select to activate the Rotation function, activate Rotation only when APS/AMS functions, or activate Rotation only when APS/AMS/Reduce functions. [19] Staple mode reset-function Staple mode is automatically canceled after a job is completed with Staple sort mode ON. (Sort mode is selected.) [20] Job offset operating Set the copier to offset the copies of different jobs. [21] Continuation print Set the copier to output multiple reserve jobs in succession. [22] Key click sound Activate or deactivate the sound each time a key is pressed on the touch panel. [23] 1 SHOT indication time Select the SHOT indication time function. [24] Power save screen Select the screen to display when pressing the [POWER SAVER ON/OFF] key. [25] START key latch function Activate or deactivate the latch function. [26] STOP key function Select to display or not to display the confirmation message when [STOP] key is pressed. [27] Auto select of Booklet copy Set the copier with FS-606 mounted to automatically select the Booklet mode when Stitch&Fold or Fold output mode is selected. [28] E.K.C. password Select the acceptable number of digits for the EKC master key code. [29] Arrow key change (Image Shift) Select the 1 step unit of the touch key to specify the shift amount in Image shift. [30] An interruption suspend way Select the timing to stop the job in progress when [INTERRUPT] is pressed. [31] E.K.C. password input timing Set the input timing for the EKC password. [32] Key click sound (No paper, toner/JAM) Select the duration of the buzzer that alerts when the machine is out of paper or when paper has misfed.
14-42

[33] Reserve copy function Set the timing for the reserve job setting. [34] Change page no. pos. (booklet) Set the machine to position the page numbers automatically on the outside edges of the copy when using Booklet with Page Numbering in Stamp. [35] Trimmer (STD / Non STD size) Set the machine to allow trimming the folded or stapled & folded sheets in nonstandard size (or wide size). [36] Timer which prohibits Print Set the timer to allow the printing job after operating the copying job. [37] Bookmark function Select to set the Bookmark function only for the current job, set for all the following jobs, or deactivate the function. [38] Delete of overlay image When selecting (or storing) overlaying image data in HDD using Overlay Memory, select to permit or prohibit deleting the selected data (or overwriting the data of the same name previously stored in HDD). [39] Orig. direction/Binding mode Select to reset or save the original direction and bind position settings made on the Special Original popup menu and Output Mode popup menu after completion of each copying job. [40] SCREEN (Line Screen) Specify the initial state of the Line Screen setting in SCREEN setting of IMAGE ADJUST. [41] SCREEN (Dot Screen) Specify the initial state of the Dot Screen setting in SCREEN setting of IMAGE ADJUST. [42] Side 2 drum clock adjust mode Set the same magnification ratio for the reverse side as that of the front side in double-sided copying. [43] Screen (FullColour - Text/Photo) Specify the initial state of the SCREEN setting in Full Colour mode with Text/Photo specified in Special Original setting. [44] Screen (FullColour - Photo) Specify the initial state of the SCREEN setting in Full Colour mode with Photo specified in Special Original setting. [45] Screen (Monochrome - Text/Photo) Specify the initial state of the SCREEN setting in Black mode with Text/Photo specified in Special Original setting. [46] Screen (Monochrome - Photo) Specify the initial state of the SCREEN setting in Black mode with Photo specified in Special Original setting.
14-43

[47] Screen (MonoColour - Text/Photo) Specify the initial state of the SCREEN setting in Single Colour mode with Text/ Photo specified in Special Original setting. [48] Screen (MonoColour - Photo) Specify the initial state of the SCREEN setting in Single Colour mode with Photo specified in Special Original setting. [49] Colour gamut Specify the latitude of the colour in printing images. NOTE: If Wide is selected, a blur may appear in high density area of the printed
image. If the printer controller version is 1.0, be sure to select Wide before making calibration on the printer controller. When the calibration is completed, be sure to resume the previous setting. With the other version of the printer controller, this setting si not required.
[50] Auto select binding mode Set the binding mode of printed sets automatically to match with the original binding mode when specified on the Special Original Screen. [51] State of Platen/RADF (Reset) When Auto Reset functions, select to reset the Platen/RADF mode to the initial setting, or save the previous setting. [52] Time lag to switch tray Specify the time-lag required when switching the paper tray to change the paper type and size while or after copying/printing. If any printed image shows uneven brightness or coated paper blisters at the time about 10 printed sheets are delivered, select Standard to let the machine have sufficient time for the fixing heat adjustment. [53] Printer Non STD centring In printer mode, the machine automatically centres the scanned image, so that the image overreaching the maximum print area (323 mm x 485 mm) can be printed without image loss. [54] SCAN E-Mail Form default Select the file form when transmitting the scanned image data. [55] SCAN FTP Form default Select the file form when storing the scanned image data in the FTP server. [56] LCT air assist fan Set the machine to blow on thick paper while feeding it. [57] Exit cooling fan (No finisher) When the finisher is not installed, set the machine to use fan to dry printed sheets to prevent sheets from sticking together. [58] Finisher operating (Thick) With a finisher installed, the machine is initially set to prefer copy speed to image quality. To improve image quality, use this setting to specify "Prefer Image Quality".
14-44
[14] Machine Management List Print
[14] Machine Management List Print

Use this function to print out the list selected from the following items. Job memory list: Programmed contents of Job memory User management list: Home position settings selected by user E.K.C. management list: Machine information managed by EKC Font pattern list: Font patterns used in the machine
Management List Print Menu Screen
Procedure 1 Touch [14] Machine management list print on the Key Operator Mode Screen to display the Management List Print Menu Screen. 2 Touch the desired item on the screen. The Basic Screen will resume automatically. 3 Press [START] to start printing the selected list. To suspend printing, press [STOP]. Press [P] and [C] in order to return to the Management List Print Menu Screen. 4 Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN on the Management List Print Menu Screen to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen.
14-45
[15] Call Remote Centre
[15] Call Remote Centre

When activated, the Remote Diagnostics option is automatically monitored by your service representative. In case of the following machine trouble, select the Call Remote Centre option. Your service representative will contact you to determine the appropriate means for resolving the problem. Call for JAM concerns Call for SC concerns Toner bottle supply call Paper supply call Call for Image quality Call for others
Call Remote Service Centre Screen
Start Call Screen
Procedure 1 Touch [15] Call remote centre on the Key Operator Mode Screen to display the Call Remote Service Centre Screen. 2 Touch the desired item key. The Start Call Screen will be displayed. 3 Touch Start to call. 4 Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN on the Start Call Screen to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen.
14-46
[16] Finisher Adjustment

Use this mode to make fine adjustments to each function of the finisher.
Finisher Adjustment Menu Screen
Stitch&Fold Stopper Position Adjustment Screen Stopper Position Adjustment Screen Fold
Trimming Stopper Position Adjustment Screen Punch Adjustment Menu Screen
Punch Kit Vertical Position Adjustment Screen Punch Kit Horizontal Position Adjustment Scre
Three-Fold Position Adjustment Screen
2 Positions Staple Pitch Adjustment Screen
14-47

Finisher Output Limit Menu Screen Output Quantity Limit Setting Screen
Permission Setting Screen
Procedure 1 Touch [16] Finisher adjustment on the Key Operator Mode Screen to display the Finisher Adjustment Menu Screen. 2 Touch the desired menu key to display the adjustment screen for each function. 3 Make fine adjustment on the screen. Touch + <> to select + or - as desired, enter the value, then touch SET. Check the entered value on the left side of the second line in the message area. If provided, touch NEXT ADJUSTMENT or PREVIOUS ADJUSTMENT to move to the next or previous adjustment item. Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the Finisher Adjustment Menu Screen. 4 Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen.
14-48
[17] Front & Back Density Setting
[17] Front & Back Density Setting

Use this function to make fine adjustments to the copy density of the front and back sides, as well as the output setting of CMYK colours.
Front&Back Density Setting Screen
Procedure 1 Touch [17] Front & Back Density setting to display the Front & Back Density Setting 2nd trans Screen. 2 Touch the desired adjustment key to make an adjustment for each side. 3 To set the 1st transmission output setting of CMYK colours, touch NEXT ADJUSTMENT and/or PREVIOUS ADJUSTMENT to display the Font & Back Density Setting 1st Trans Screen. 4 Touch the desired adjustment key to highlight it. 5 Touch OK to complete the setting and restore the Key Operator Mode Screen, or touch CANCEL to restore the previous setting.
14-49
[18] Scan Transmission Setting

Use this function to change or delete the address registered for transmitting the image data scanned on the machine. The following three address types can be registered. E-mail (entry name, e-mail address) HDD (entry name, box No.) FTP (profile name, host address, file path, login, password)
NOTE: The [18] Scan Transmission Setting key will function only when IP-901 Print Controller is installed in the machine.
Key Operator Mode Screen Scan Transmission Setting Screen
Change E-Mail Address Screen
Change Box No. Screen
Change FTP Address Screen
Input Key Screen
14-50

Procedure 1 Touch [18] Scan transmission setting on the Key Operator Mode Screen to display the Scan Transmission Setting Screen. 2 Select the desired address type. Touch E-Mail, HDD, or FTP to display the registered name keys on each page. 3 Select the name key to be changed or deleted. Touch the Lower arrow key to scroll, or Upper arrow key to return. To delete the address: Touch to highlight the desired name key, then touch DELETE. The selected key will be deleted from the screen. To change the address: (1) Touch to highlight the desired name key, then touch CHANGE. The subsequent screen according to the address type will be displayed. (2) Touch to highlight the registered item key on the left, touch Input key indicate to display the Input Key Screen, then change the information under the registered item key using the alphabet keys on the screen. Touch OK to return to the previous screen. (3) Touch OK on each screen to complete the setting and restore the Scan Transmission Setting Screen. 4 Touch OK on the Scan Transmission Setting Screen to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen, or touch CANCEL to restore the previous setting.
14-51
[19] Non-Image Area Erase Setting
[19] Non-Image Area Erase Setting

Select the original density level of Non-Image Area Erase function to be in effect when this feature is selected on the Application Selection Screen after power is turned on or after Auto Reset occurs.
Non-Image Area Erase Setting Screen
Procedure 1 Touch [19] Non-image area erase setting on the Key Operator Mode Screen to display the Non-Image Area Erase Setting Screen. 2 Touch AUTO to let the machine select the density level automatically, or manually select the density level from the five exposure levels provided on the screen. 3 Touch OK to complete the setting and restore the Key Operator Mode Screen, or touch CANCEL to restore the previous setting.
14-52
[20] AE Adjustment
[20] AE Adjustment
Use this function to set the adjustment level of the automatic exposure (AE) suitable for either text originals or photo originals. Different setting is available for each of the colour mode and monochrome mode.
AE Adjustment Screen
Procedure 1 Touch [20] AE adjustment on the Key Operator Mode Screen to display the AE Adjustment Screen. 2 Touch NEXT ADJUSTMENT or PREVIOUS ADJUSTMENT to select the mode to be adjusted. The selected mode will be displayed in the message area. 3 Specify the adjustment level. Touch + <> to select + or - as desired, enter the value, then touch SET. Check the entered value on the left side of the second line in the message area. The AE will function suitable for text originals if specified value is positive, or for photo originals if negative value is entered. 4 Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to complete the setting and return to the Key Operator Mode Screen.
14-53
[21] Execute Adjustment Operation
[21] Execute Adjustment Operation

Select the desired item to execute an adjustment operation. Automatic gamma adjustment should be performed if reproducibility of the whole image is not satisfactory. Colour Regist auto adjustment should be performed if CMY colour layers show any gap compared with the original during successive copying. Toner refresh mode should be performed if you find the following conditions: - Printed image shows a rough texture. - Small dots appear randomly on the printed paper. - Small white spot appears in the printed image. Belt refresh mode should be performed if white lines appear along with the paper feeding direction at the same position in all CMYK colour layers.
Execute Adjustment Operation Screen
Procedure 1 Touch [21] Execute adjust operation on the Key Operator Mode Screen to display the Execute Adjustment Operation Screen. 2 Touch the desired item key to highlight it. 3 Touch OK to complete the setting and restore the Key Operator Mode Screen. 4 Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the Basic Screen. The machine will execute the adjustment operation of the selected item automatically, with the executing adjustment message displayed in the message area (approx. 2 30). 5 When the adjustment is completed, Position original in the RADF face up message will be displayed on the Basic Screen.
14-54
[22] Magnification Adjustment
[22] Magnification Adjustment

Use this mode to make various adjustments concerning the magnification function. Printer vertical mag. adj.: adjusts the vertical magnification of the printer system. Printer horizontal mag. adj.: adjusts the horizontal magnification of the printer system. Scanner vertical mag. adj.; adjusts the vertical magnification of the scanner system.
Magnification Adjustment Menu Screen
Printer Drum Clock Adjustment Screen
Printer Horizontal Adjustment Screen
Scanner Drum Clock Adjustment Screen
Procedure 1 Touch [22] Magnification adjustment on the Key Operator Mode Screen to display the Magnification Adjustment Menu Screen. 2 Touch the desired menu key to display the adjustment screen for each function. 3 Make fine adjustment on the screen. Touch + <> to select + or - as desired, enter the value, then touch SET. Check the entered value on the left side of the second line in the message area. If provided, touch NEXT ADJUSTMENT or PREVIOUS ADJUSTMENT to move to the next or previous adjustment item. Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the Magnification Adjustment Menu Screen. 4 Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen.
14-55
[23] Timing Adjustment

Use this mode to make fine adjustments of the timing for printing or scanning function. Printer lead edge timing adj.: adjusts the lead edge timing. Printer registration loop adj.: adjusts the paper loop amount in the registration roller section. Printer pre-registration adj.: adjusts the paper loop amount in each tray and ADU pre-registration roller section. Printer erasure amount adj.: conducts a leading edge erasure amount adjustment. Scanner re-start timing adj.: adjusts re-start timing for original scanning. RADF registration loop adj.: adjusts the original loop amount in the RADF registration roller section.
Timing Adjustment Menu Screen
Printer Lead Edge Timing Adjustment Screen Printer Registration Loop Adjustment Screen
Printer Pre-registration Adjustment Screen
Printer Erasure Amount Adjustment Screen
Scanner Re-start Timing Adjustment Screen
RADF Registration Loop Adjustment Screen
14-56

Procedure 1 Touch [23] Timing adjustment on the Key Operator Mode Screen to display the Timing Adjustment Menu Screen. 2 Touch the desired menu key to display the adjustment screen for each function. 3 Make fine adjustment on the screen. Touch + <> to select + or - as desired, enter the value, then touch SET. Check the entered value on the left side of the second line in the message area. If provided, touch NEXT ADJUSTMENT or PREVIOUS ADJUSTMENT to move to the next or previous adjustment item. Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the Timing Adjustment Menu Screen. 4 Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen.
14-57
[24] Centring Adjustment
[24] Centring Adjustment

Use this mode to make various adjustments concerning the image centring function. Printer centring adjustment: adjusts the mis-centring of images vertical to paper feed direction. Scanner centring adjustment: adjusts the centring when scanning the platen original. RADF centring adjustment: adjusts the centring when scanning the RADF original.
Centring Adjustment Menu Screen
Printer Centring Adjustment Screen
Scanner (Platen) Centring Adjustment Screen
RADF Centring Adjustment Screen
Procedure 1 Touch [24] Centring adjustment on the Key Operator Mode Screen to display the Centring Adjustment Menu Screen. 2 Touch the desired menu key to display the adjustment screen for each function. 3 Make fine adjustment on the screen. Touch + <> to select + or - as desired, enter the value, then touch SET. Check the entered value on the left side of the second line in the message area. If provided, touch NEXT ADJUSTMENT or PREVIOUS ADJUSTMENT to move to the next or previous adjustment item. Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the Centring Adjustment Menu Screen. 4 Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen.
14-58
[25] Printer Gamma Sensor Adjustment

Use this function to make various adjustments concerning the gamma sensor.
Printer Gamma Sensor Adjustment Screen
Procedure 1 Touch [25] Printer Gamma Sensor adjustment on the Key Operator Mode Screen to display the Printer Gamma Sensor Adjustment Screen. 2 Select the desired adjustment item on the screen. Six items are provided: LS200, LS150, DS200, DS150, CONTONE, and ED. Touch NEXT ADJUSTMENT or PREVIOUS ADJUSTMENT to move to the next or previous adjustment item.
NOTE: Some adjustment items cannot be displayed if the screen is specified as OFF state in the Memory Switch setting.
Touching Adj. data reset will display the Reset Confirmation Screen. Touch YES to reset the adjustment value to the initial state, or touch NO to cancel. 3 Touch COPY SCREEN to move to the Basic Screen to print a chart. Load several sheets of A4 paper on the Multi-sheet bypass tray, then press [START] to output the test chart. When output is completed, the Printer Gamma Sensor Adjustment Screen will be restored, with the message Please load output paper in Platen and push [START] button displayed. 4 Place the test chart face down on the platen glass with green arrow * pointing at the left side as shown below, and put about 10 sheets of blank copy paper on top of the chart.
Green arrow Place the chart FACE DOWN
14-59

5 Touch the Start key on the screen. The machine starts the adjustment automatically.
NOTE: If no paper is left in the Multi-sheet bypass tray, the adjustment will not start even if the Start key is touched.
The message Completed will be displayed when the adjustment is completed normally.
NOTE: If an error code (Error 1, 2, or 10) is displayed, check that the test chart is placed properly. If any other error code is displayed, please contact your service representative.
6 Repeat the steps 2 to 5 as desired. 7 Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen.
14-60
Index
Index
Index
Symbols [C] (CLEAR QTY.) key 2-6 [P] (COUNTER) key 2-7 Numerics 1.000 magnification mode 3-25 1-2 copying 3-28 2 in 1 copying 10-11 2-1 copying 3-36 2-2 copying 3-28 4 in 1 copying 10-11 8 in 1 copying 10-11 A About Colours 7-4 ACCESS key 2-7 Actions in response to troubles 1-8 ADD PAPER key 5-9 ADD TONER icon 2-8, 13-2 Adjustment Proof Copy 7-23 AE Adjustment 14-53 AMS (Automatic Magnification Selection) 3-18 APPLICATION key 2-9 Application Selection Screen 10-2 Applying Filters 7-16 APS (Automatic Paper Selection) 3-16 AUTO Layout 10-47 Auto Low Power 2-19 AUTO mode (Repeat) 10-41 AUTO RESET key 2-7 Auto Shut-Off 2-20 B Background Whiteness 7-19 Basic Screen 2-8 Before successive holidays 1-9 Binding Direction 9-2 Binding mode 3-59 BLACK mode 3-2
Black print counter 2-4 Booklet 10-15 Booklet tray 2-10 Brightness (B) 7-6 C Call for Service Screen 5-2 Call Remote Centre 14-46 Cartridge housing 2-11 CAUTION 1-4 Caution indicator 1-12 Caution label 1-12 Centring Adjustment 14-58 Chapter 10-8 CHECK key 2-6 Check Mode 4-4 Cleaning Image Scanning Section 13-17 Clearing Mishandled Paper 5-5 CMYK Model 7-4 CMYK value 7-29 Colour Adjustment 7-24 Colour Balance Adjustment 7-29 Colour Mode 3-2 Combination 10-11 Consumables 1-9 Contrast 7-16, 7-34 Contrast Adjustment Dial 2-6 Control panel 2-3 Control Panel Adjustment 14-35 Control Panel Layout 2-6 Copier Initial Setting 14-11 Copy count 13-21 Copy Density 7-19 COPY key 2-6 Count/Set indicator 2-9 Counter List Screen 13-22 Cover sheet feeder control panel 2-12 Cover sheet feeding 8-20 D Date & Time Setting 14-5 Density Shift 7-22 Disassemble and modification 1-5 Dither (Error Diffustion) method 7-14
ix3
Index
Document glass 13-18 Dot Screen 7-14 Double-sided copies 3-28 Dual Page 10-23 E E.K.C. All Count Reset 14-18 E.K.C. Data Edit 14-15 E.K.C. Function (Web Utilities) 11-10 E.K.C. Function Setting 14-19 EKC (Electronic Key Counter) 14-13 EKC master key code 14-14 EKC password 2-22, 14-15 EKC Setting Menu Screen 14-14 Electromagnetic Interference 1-11 Electronic Key Counter (EKC) 2-22 E-Mail Transmission Setting 14-9 E-Mail Transmission Setting (Web Utilities) 11-8 Execute Adjustment Operation 14-54 External Machine Items 2-2 F Face down group exit 3-51 Face down non-sort exit 3-51 Face up group exit 3-51 Face up mode (with Finisher) 3-50 Face up mode (without Finisher) 3-46 Face up non-sort exit 3-51 Finisher Adjustment 14-47 Finisher door 2-10 Fixed magnification mode 3-26 Fixing unit 2-4 Fold mode 8-9 Frame/Fold Erasure 10-44 FREE JOB key 2-8 Front & Back Density Setting 14-49 Front door 2-3 FS-513/FS-606 Finisher 2-10 FULL COLOUR mode 3-2 G Gloss Mode 7-17, 7-34 Grounding 1-7 Group mode (with Finisher) 3-50 Group mode (without Finisher) 3-46 H HELP key 2-6 Help Mode 4-16 Help Screen 4-16 High Compression 7-31 High Resolution 7-31 HSB Model 7-6 HSB value 7-26 Hue (H) 7-6 I Image adjust icon 2-8 IMAGE ADJUST key 2-9 Image Detection 7-15 Image Insert 10-19 Image Shift 10-49 Improving Colour Copy Quality 7-18 Inserting a New Staple Cartridge 13-7 Installation 1-7 Installation Space 1-15 Internal Machine Items 2-4 Interrupt Copying 4-8 INTERRUPT key 2-6 IP Address Setting 14-8 J Jam Position Screen 5-5, 5-8 Job Memory 4-11 JOB MEMORY key 2-7 Job Recall 4-14 Job Status (Web Utilities) 11-6 Job Status Screen 3-43 Job Store 4-11 K Key counter 2-3 Key Operator Data Setting 14-26 Key Operator Mode Screen 14-3
Index
Key Operator password 14-2 Keypad 2-6 L Language Select Setting 14-7 Laser Safety 1-10 LCD touch screen 2-6 Lens Mode 3-25 Line Screen 7-14 Loading Paper 2-23 Lock/Delete Job Memory 14-21 LT-211 Large Capacity Tray 2-13 Lunch Hour Off Setting 14-33 M Machine Management List Print 14-45 Machine setting file (Web Utilities) 11-25 Magnification Adjustment 14-55 Main Body Specifications 6-2 Main Page 11-3 Main power switch 2-4 Manual Low Power 2-21 Manual Shut-Off 2-21 Memory indicator 2-9 Memory Overflow 5-11 Memory Switch Setting 14-38 Message area 2-8 Mixed Original 9-9 Modifying Colours 7-7 Multi-Page Enlargement 10-30 Multi-sheet bypass tray 2-3, 3-20 Munsell colour system 7-6 N Non STD size mode 9-6 Non-Image Area Erase 10-34 Non-Image Area Erase Setting 14-52 Non-sort mode (with Finisher) 3-50 Non-sort mode (without Finisher) 3-46 O Off-Line Finishing 8-23 Option Specifications 6-4 Original count 2-9 Original Direction 9-4 Original direction icon 2-8 Original Form 9-6 Original Image 7-39 Original Information 12-10 Original Thickness 9-14 Original Type 7-39 Output icon area 2-9 Output Mode 3-46, 3-50 Overlay 10-67 Overlay Memory 10-70 Ozone Release 1-11 P Panel Contrast / Key Sound Adjustment 14-25 Paper indicator 2-23 Paper Information 12-2 Paper loading button 2-13 Paper Size 3-16, 12-7 Paper Type / Special Size Set 14-22 Paper Type Set (Bypass) 14-24 Paper Weight 12-3 Periodic Maintenance (PM) 13-24 PI-110 Cover Sheet Feeder 2-12 PK-507/PK-508 Punching kit 2-11 Platen cover 2-3, 13-20 Platen glass 3-8 Platen Glass Originals 12-10 Platen store mode 3-38 PM counter 13-25 PM icon 2-8 Positioning Originals 3-4 Power cord 1-5 Power OFF/ON Screen 5-14 Power plug 1-6 Power Save Setting 14-37 POWER SAVER ON/OFF key 2-6 Power source 1-6 Power switch 2-3 Primary (Main) tray 2-10 PRINT JOB key 2-8 Print quantity 3-10
ix5
Index
Printer Gamma Sensor Adjustment 1459 PRINTER key 2-6 Program Job 10-27 Proof Copy 4-2 PROOF COPY key 2-6 Punch mode 8-12 R RADF (Reversing Automatic Document Feeder) 2-3 RADF Originals 12-11 RADF platen guide cover 13-19 RADF store mode 3-38 Recalling Previous Job Settings 4-15 Reduce & Shift 10-52 Regulation Notices 1-10 Repeat 10-38, 10-41 Repeat mode (Repeat) 10-41 Reproducing Images 7-14 Reserve 3-40 Reverse Image 10-36 RGB Model 7-4 RGB value 7-24 Right & Left bind 3-59 Right side door 2-3 Rotation 8-4 Rotation group mode 3-46 Rotation icon 2-8 ROTATION OFF key 2-9 Rotation sort mode 3-46 S Safety Information 1-4 Saturation (S) 7-6 SCAN JOB key 2-8 Scan Transmission Setting 14-50 Scan Transmission Setting (Web Utilities) 11-21 Scanner Function Setting 14-20 SCANNER key 2-6 Screen Setting 7-31 Secondary (Sub) tray 2-10 Sharpness 7-16, 7-34 Sheet/Cover Insertion 10-4 SINGLE COLOUR mode 3-2 Smooth Tone 7-31 Sort mode 3-50 SPECIAL ORIGINAL key 2-9 Special paper 3-20, 12-9 Stamp 10-55 Standard/Optional Equipment 2-5 Staple mode 3-50 START key 2-6 STATUS key 2-9 Stitch & Fold mode 8-9 STOP key 2-6 STORE key 2-9 Store mode 3-38 System Initial Setting 14-5 T Tab paper mode 9-6 Thick original mode 9-14 Thin original mode 9-14 Three primary colours of light 7-4 Three primary colours of pigment 7-4 Three-Fold mode 8-15 Timer Action On/Off Setting 14-32 TIMER indicator 2-6 Timer Interrupt Password Setting 14-34 Timer Setting 14-30 Timing Adjustment 14-56 Toner access door 2-3 Toner recovery box 2-3, 13-15 Toner recovery box icon 2-8 Top bind 3-59 Total counter 2-4 Tray Adjustment 8-26 Tray Auto Select Setting 14-36 Tray/ Exit Tray Capacity 12-5 Trimmer unit tray 2-14 Trimming mode 8-17 Troubleshooting Tips 5-15 TU-109 Trimmer Unit 2-14 TU-109A kit 2-14 TYPE/SIZE key 2-9
Index
U Unsuitable RADF Originals 12-10 User Lens Mode Ratio Setting 14-12 User Setting Mode 14-12 V Ventilation 1-8 Vert./Horiz. mode (Repeat) 10-38 Vertical/Horizontal zoom mode 8-6 W Wake-up Screen 2-16 Warm-up Screen 2-16 WARNING 1-4 Warning and Precaution Symbols 1-4 Waste basket 2-11, 2-15, 13-11, 13-13 Watermark 10-62 Web Utilities 11-2 Weekly Timer 8-2 Weekly Timer (Key Operator Mode) 1427 Weekly Timer On/Off Setting 14-29 Weekly Timer password 14-27 Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen 1428 When moving the machine 1-9 Work table 2-3 Z Z-Folded Original 9-12 Zoom mode 3-26
ix7
Index
ix-8

User Manual

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originalbeschreibung:

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

User Manual

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

User Manual

Turning On the Power Switch ..................................................... 2-16

Loading Paper ............................................................................ 2-23

Setting Print Quantity .................................................................. 3-10

Making Double-Sided Copies (1)2, 2)2) .................................. 3-28

Option Specifications ................................................................... 6-4

Selecting Density Level and Whitening the Background ................................................................................. 7-19

Original Information ................................................................... 12-10

Checking Copy Count ............................................................... 13-21

Periodic Maintenance ............................................................... 13-24

[1] System Initial Setting ............................................................. 14-5

[4] EKC (Electronic Key Counter) Function Setting ................... 14-13

Features of the bizhub PRO C500

Features of the bizhub PRO C500

Features of the bizhub PRO C500

Features of the bizhub PRO C500

Features of the bizhub PRO C500

Features of the bizhub PRO C500

Legal Restrictions on Copying

Legal Restrictions on Copying

Caution Labels and Indicators

Caution Labels and Indicators

(Right side of the fixing unit)

CAUTION PRECAUCION CAUTION VORSICHT ATTENZIONE

ATTENTION CUIDADO ATTENTION PRECAUCION

(Top surface of the fixing unit)

Caution Labels and Indicators

(Right rear side of the Main body)

(Inside of the LCT)

Caution Labels and Indicators

(Finisher with PI-110 Cover Sheet Feeder only)

bizhub PRO C500 + CV-131 (Front)

bizhub PRO C500 + CV-131 (Right side)

bizhub PRO C500 + DF-319 (Front)

bizhub PRO C500 + DF-319 (Right side)

bizhub PRO C500 + DF-319 + FS-513 (Front)

bizhub PRO C500 + DF-319 + FS-606 + PI-110 + LT-211 (Front)

bizhub PRO C500 + DF-319 +LT-211 (Right Side)

Machine Configuration.........................................................................2-2 Turning On the Power Switch ............................................................2-16 Loading Paper....................................................................................2-23

DF-319 Document feeder CV-131 Platen cover Work table

LT-211 Large capacity tray

IP-901Printer controller (Fiery S300 50C-K)

TU-109A kit TU-109 Trimmer unit

FS-606 Finisher with PK-507/PK-508 Punching kit

Turning On the Power Switch

Turning On the Power Switch

The Wake-up Screen and Warm-up Screens will be displayed.

Turning On the Power Switch

The Basic Screen will be displayed.

Turning On the Power Switch

Be sure not to use the main power switch in usual operation.

Turning On the Power Switch

Turning On the Power Switch

Turning On the Power Switch

The Shut-Off mode will be activated.

Turning On the Power Switch

For details of the EKC setting, see p. 14-13 to p. p. 14-20.

Enter EKC password.

If an invalid EKC password is entered, continue by entering the correct password.

Start a copying job.

Adjust the position of the side guide plate.

Adjust the position of the rear stopper.

Place paper on the tray.